Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 465

N E C I T 3 5 2 0 / I T 2 5 2 0 O P E R A T I O N S M A N U A L

Issue 2

NEC IT3520/IT2520

Operations Manual
NEC America, Inc. Document Solutions CC56001 Issue 2

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice at the discretion of NEC America, Inc. This document has been prepared for the use of employees and customers of NEC America, Inc. and may not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright 2003

NEC America, Inc. 6535 N. State Highway 161 Irving, TX 75039-2402


Document Solutions

Regulatory and Safety Information

SECTION 1

REGULATORY INFORMATION
The following information provides data for using this product on the Public Switched Telephone Network, as required by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 1.1 FCC Notification This product complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. On the bottom of this product is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC Registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN). If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This product uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that can be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company servicing your area to ensure the REN is not exceeded. If this product causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance. If advanced notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, product, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this product. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make any necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this product, please contact NEC America, Inc. 1-800-232-9632 for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to remove the product from the network until the problem is resolved.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

The following maintenance can be performed by the customer: Document Jam Print Paper Jam Installing Print Paper Replacing the spare TX Marker Stamp Others

This product cannot be used on telephone company provided coin-op service. A connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. If a telephone set is to be used with this product, insure that it meets FCC Part 68 for Hearing Aid compatibility. When programming and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, please remember to: Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.

This product generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type-tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. Part 15 is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the facsimile with respect to the receiver. Move the facsimile away from the receiver. Plug the facsimile into a different power outlet so that the facsimile and the receiver are on different branch circuits.

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

As an ENERGY STAR partner, NEC Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.

1.2

Industry Canada Notification Certification Number: Complies with: Ringer Equivalence Number: Connector: 140 11281 A CP-01, Issue 8, Part I 0.4 CA 11A

The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or installations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request that the user disconnect the equipment. For their own protection, users should ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This protection may be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION 1: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

CAUTION 2: The act of monitoring or recording telephone conversations under certain circumstances may violate federal or state statutes. Consultation with your legal counsel prior to engaging in such practices would be advisable. NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). Safety Certifications This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply with all the applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment U.L. 1950. This equipment complies with CSA standard C22.2 No. 225.

1.3

Laser Classification and Safety Laser Safety This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) radiation performance standard, according to the Radiation Control For Health And Safety Act of 1968. This means that this product does not produce hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside this product is completely contained within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Internal Laser Radiation
Product Maximum Radiation Power Wavelength

IT3520 IT2520

28.9 uW 28.9 uW

770 nm to 795 nm 770 nm to 795 nm

This is a Class IIIB laser diode assembly that has a visually invisible laser beam. The print head assembly (laser) is not a field service item; therefore, the print head should not be opened under any circumstance.

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Laser access window

When the side cover is opened and the imaging unit is removed.

Classification of the Laser Product This product is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the CDRH regulations of the USA.

1.4

CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown in the following illustration indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.5

Transmitter Subscribers Identification As of December 20, 1992, the Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 requires that the following information must be included in the top margin of each page of the facsimile transmission: The date and time the facsimile was sent. The name of the business or company. The facsimile telephone number of the sending machine. It is illegal to turn off the TSI feature.

This facsimile machine meets these requirements by including this information within the Transmitters Station Identification (TSI). Please refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4, and Section 2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-19 for instructions on programming the TSI and the date and time. It is most important to always keep the TSI feature turned on when sending a document.

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1 Installation Space Sufficient space must be provided to enable normal operation, routine checks, replacement of consumables, and to perform routine maintenance on the product.

There is a ventilation duct on the back of the unit. A gap of at least four inches (100 mm) must be maintained. The figures above represent the dimensions when the optional assemblies are mounted.

2.2

Using this Product The following items describe general areas of product usage by the end-user. Conditions on Installation and Use The following list provides safety warnings for properly operating the machine. Please adhere to these guidelines, as serious injury or machine failure may occur.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Warnings
This is a warning that indicates a hazard that can lead to serious injury or death.
Stop using this product immediately if smoke or an abnormal odor is coming from the unit. Failure to do so may result in a fire, electric shock, or product failure. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet immediately, and contact the dealer for service. Do not place small metal objects or containers filled with liquids on top of the unit. Items such as paper clips, chemicals, cosmetics, drinking glasses, flower vases, etc. can harm the machine. Using the items above may result in fire or machine damage, if liquids or metal objects drop into the unit. Do not disassemble or remodel this product. Failure to do so may result in a fire, electric shock, or product failure. Also, damage to your eyesight may occur if the laser is serviced. Contact the service center or dealer for any internal checks and repairs available if there are no appropriate instructions in this manual. Take care not to damage the power cord in any manner. Do not twist, heat, forcibly pull, or place heavy objects on this cord. Such action may result in a fire or electric shock.

Stop using this product immediately if this product is dropped or any cover is damaged. Failure to do so may result in a fire, electric shock, or product failure. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet immediately, and contact the dealer for service. Stop using this product immediately if water or any metal object is dropped inside the product. Failure to do so may result in a fire, electric shock, or product failure. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet immediately, and contact the dealer for service. Do not unplug the power cord with wet hands. Such action may result in an electric shock due to electrical discharge. Do not operate the product or install any machine options during a thunderstorm. Such actions may result in an electric shock or product failure.

High voltage is used inside this product. Do not remove any of the covers. Such action may result in electric shock. Do not touch the toner fixing unit located inside the machine, or the area around it, as it becomes extremely hot. Some areas are hot enough to cause serious burn injury.

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Cautions
This is a caution that indicates a hazard that can lead to injury or damage to property.
Do not place the product in direct sunlight or near a heater. Such an environment may cause product failure or even a fire due to extreme temperatures inside the machine chassis. Do not place the product in a humid, dusty, smoky, or steamy environment. Such an environment may cause product failure or poor performance in the scanning and printing mechanisms. Do not cover the ventilation grille on the product. If this grille is blocked or covered, internal temperature will rise and may cause product failure. Do not place the product on an uneven surface, or somewhere that is subject to vibration or mechanical instability. Such an environment may cause injury or failure if the product falls down or tips over. The ground cable must be connected. In certain cases, a ground cable should be connected to an independent earth ground. Do not connect the ground to a gas pipe, lightning rod, water pipe, or a telephone ground. Hold the solid plug when disconnecting the power cord. The power cord should be disconnected by holding and pulling on the solid plug part and not on the cord itself. Pulling on the cord may cause power cord damage, resulting in a fire or electric shock. Lift the product in the positions indicated when transporting the product. Lifting the product using any other area may result in injury to person or product damage.

Care must be taken not to catch your fingers or clothes when closing the cover. Some surfaces are sharp or pointed, which may result in injury to person or clothing.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Cautions
Before moving the product, first disconnect the power cord and telephone/facsimile line connection. Failure to do so may damage the power cord and line cable. Do not touch the inside of the side cover or the copper terminals located at the lower part of the imaging unit. Doing so may result in product failure due to static discharge. Do not place the power cord near a heater. This may cause the power cord to melt, thus exposing internal wiring that can cause fire or an electric shock. For product and property safety reasons, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet when this product is not to be used for prolonged periods. Doing so will avoid the possibility of fire or product failure.

Recommendations
This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedure should be followed for proper performance.
Do not place the product in an excessively hot (over 87 degrees F) or cold (less than 27 degrees F) environment. Doing so may result in erratic operation. Do not install the product in a location that is subject to excessive vibration. Doing so may cause improper operation or product damage. Do not place the product in a location where chemical vapors are emitted. Doing so may damage the product or cause improper operation. Do not operate this product near other devices that are affected by electromagnetic radiation (such as a radio or television). This product complies within the limits for a FCC Part 15 Class A digital device. If this product is used in a residential location, it may cause electromagnetic interference. In this case, the user is asked to take appropriate measures to minimize the interference. Do not use a hard or pointed object to press the Touch Panel. Doing so may permanently damage the panel.

Do not place the product in a location that is subject to significant temperature changes (such as near an air conditioner or heater). Doing so may cause improper product operation due to excess temperature variations and increased condensation in the product.

10

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Recommendations
Do not open any covers while the product is operating. Doing so will suspend operations and may cause a paper jam. Do not lean or place any heavy objects on the Operation Panel. Doing so may result in Operation Panel failure. Do not place any other objects on the Multipurpose Manual Bypass Tray except copy papers. Doing so may damage the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Cautions on Power Supply

Warnings
This is a warning that indicates a hazard that can lead to serious injury or death.
Use only on U.S. standard 120V AC power. Using any other voltage source can cause product failure or fire. Do not use this product in countries other than the United States and Canada, as the product is designed for use in these countries only. Use in other countries can cause fire, electric shock, and damage to the internal power supply because of voltage differences. Also communication problems can occur because of different telephone line parameters. This product must be plugged into its own independent wall outlet circuit. Do not plug the power cord into a wall outlet that is also powering devices such as air conditioners, copiers, or refrigerators, etc. Doing so can cause improper operation due to power surges caused by the other device. The wall outlet must be able to handle the amount of current to properly operate the product. The wall outlet circuit must be capable of providing 10 amperes, or more, for proper operation.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Toner Bottle and Imaging Unit

Cautions
This is a caution that indicates a hazard that can lead to injury or damage to property.
Do not throw used toner bottles or imaging units into an incinerator or fire. The toner is highly flammable and can cause a fire to spread quickly.

Recommendations
This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedure should be followed for proper performance.
Only use toner bottles and imaging units specified by NEC America, Inc. Use of unauthorized parts and consummables may result in unit failure or a reduction in print quality. In certain cases, this may also void the machines warranty. Do not store a toner bottle or imaging unit in the following environments: Hot, humid or dusty areas; areas near direct flame; areas in direct sunlight; areas near magnetically sensitive objects (such as floppy disks, etc.); in a vehicle or area where extreme temperature variations can occur. Doing so can result in poor print quality. Do not open the wrapping of the toner bottle or imaging unit until it is to be used. Doing so can result in poor print quality. Make sure the toner bottle or imaging unit is not dropped or thrown. Doing so can result in unit failure and/or poor print quality. Do not store a toner bottle or imaging unit upright or upside down. Doing so can result in print failures. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the imaging units photosensitive parts. Doing so can result in unit failure or poor print quality.

12

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Print Paper

Recommendations
This is a recommendation that indicates a certain procedure should be followed for proper performance.
Only use the types specified by NEC America, Inc. Do not use wrinkled, folded, damp paper, or paper that has already been printed on. This can result in poor print quality or machine failure. For details concerning which types of paper to use, consult your dealer. Paper Storage Even paper that meets the required standards will deteriorate if stored improperly. A deterioration in paper quality may result in failure of the paper feed mechanisms, a print paper jam, or reduction in overall print quality. The following items should be kept in mind when storing print paper: Be sure to store the paper in a dry, low humidly environment. Do not unwrap a ream of paper until it is ready for use. The wrapping helps keep out moisture. Store the paper on a flat surface. Do not store the paper at floor level, as humidity is generally higher at that location. Make sure that paper is not folded or curled when stored. Do not store reams of paper on their ends, or stack too high. Do not store paper in areas of direct sunlight or in places subject to large temperature variations. If the paper is exposed to areas of high humidity, leave the paper (while still in the wrapper) in the area it is to be used for a day, or more. This will assist condition the paper to the proper environment.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Other Conditions of Use

Others
Normal international communications may sometimes not be possible depending on the telephone line status. Many times international facsimile communication is affected by various noise on the telephone line. Items such as echoes, static, timing problems, etc., can degrade a facsimile communication. Many times the problem is corrected when the unit interrupts a connection and redials the destination. Ventilate the area. Ozone is produced as a normal by-product of the printer engine. The quantity of ozone is well below the level that is harmful to your health. However, the odor produced may be unpleasant if the unit is in an area with poor ventilation. In such cases, be sure to properly maintain ventilation in the room containing the machine. When using 2-Sided Copying. If 2-Sided Copying is executed with the Duplex Unit, paper printed on one side is ejected onto the tray. This paper is then automatically inserted to print on the other side of the paper. The purpose of this operation is to turn over the paper and is not a malfunction. Do not pull out or touch the paper that is printed on one side and ejected onto the tray. Otherwise, copying may not be completed properly, or a paper jam or other failure may occur. The cooling fan comes on intermittently. The products cooling fan is connected to a thermostat. When the internal temperature raises to a certain level, the cooling fan is engaged to circulate cool air throughout the unit.

If a Humidifier is used. If tap or well water is used in a room humidifier, impurities in the water are discharged into the rooms air supply. This can cause deposits to build up inside the print engine and may cause poor print quality. It is recommended to only use distilled water which contains only minute quantities of impurities.

14

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 3

LEGAL RESTRICTIONS TO COPYING


Copying of the following items are forbidden under certain circumstances. The list is not all inclusive and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult an attorney. Obligations or Securities of the Unites States Government, such as: Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Bonds and obligations of certain agencies of the government such as FHA, etc. Bonds. (US Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds.) Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to copy a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes.) Postage Stamps - canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic purposes, postage stamps may be photographed provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 3/4 or more than 1-1/2 times the linear dimensions of the original.) Postal Money Orders. Bills, Checks, or Drafts for Money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States. Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever denomination, which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for War Veterans. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, bank, or Corporation. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the copyright falls within the "fair use" or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.) Passports. (Foreign passports may be photographed.)

15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Immigration Papers. Draft Registration Cards. Selective Service Induction Papers which bear any of the following information: Registrants earnings or income Registrants dependency status Registrants Court record Exceptions: U.S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be photographed. Registrants previous military service Registrants physical or mental condition

16

Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by Military, Naval personnel, or by members of the various Federal departments and bureaus, such as FBI, CIA, Treasury, etc. (unless a photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.) Copying the following is also prohibited in certain states: Automobile Licenses, Drivers Licenses, and Automobile Certificates of Title.

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Useful Information
Please check that the following accessories are enclosed before starting operations. Please order consumables from your NEC authorized dealer when they run out.

Accessories

Operation Manual Quick Reference Guide Telephone line cord Power cord Print paper size label Imaging Unit

1 1 1 1 1 set 1

Consumables

Imaging Unit Toner bottle Spare TX Marker Stamp (for optional TX Marker Stamp) Staples (for optional Finisher) Staples/Saddle (for optional Finisher Saddle/Folding kit)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Specifications
Product Number Communication standard Applicable communication lines Standard cassette IT3520 G3 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) Universal cassette x 2 Universal Cassette: 11x17, 11x14, Legal, Letter, Letter(Landscape), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 Paper Sizes Large Capacity Cabinet (*1): Letter Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray: 11x17, Legal, Letter, Letter(Landscape), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 (Landscape) Paper types Recording system Power requirements Stand-by/Power Saving Mode Transmission Mode Reception Mode Copying Mode Maximum Standard paper (50 to 105g/m2), Recycled paper, Card (91 to 210gm2), OHP sheets Electronic photographic recording system 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 10A :approx. 7W :approx. 41W :approx. 41W :approx. 680W :approx. 1100W Stand-by/Power Saving Mode Transmission Mode Reception Mode Copying Mode Maximum :approx. 7W :approx. 41W :approx. 41W :approx. 590W :approx. 1000W IT2520

Power consumption

External dimensions Weight Required environment DC resistance Ni-MH battery for memory back-up (*1) Optional

677 x 710 x 860mm (WxDxH) 170 lbs (77kg) Temperature: 27.1oF (10oC) to 87.8oF (31oC) Humidity: 15 to 80% 298 ohms Voltage: 4.8V Capacity: 650mAh (*2)

(*2) The Ni-MH battery for memory back-up should not be replaced by the user. Contact your service center for replacement in case of failure.

18

Regulatory and Safety Information

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Options
The following optional parts are available for the NEC IT3520/IT2520. These allow for more efficient and convenient operation.

Optional Memory Board 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB - This memory option increases the document storage capacity. This is convenient when scanning and copying large volumes of documents. It also allows for more received document storage, if the machine should run out of print paper. Paper Feed Cabinets Up to four layers of cassettes, including two standard cassettes, can be installed.
Types of Paper Cassettes Paper Capacity

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Paper Feed Cabinet 2-Way Paper Feed Cabinet Large Capacity Cabinet

(1) 550 sheet cassette with one empty drawer (2) 550 sheet cassettes 2, 750 sheets

2-Step Copy Desk Optional 2-Step Copy Desk allow for height adjustments. Duplex Unit Allows printing on both sides of the print paper. Ideal for reports, books, and publications, etc. Job Separator Offers sorting by the user designating which tray gets copier output and which tray gets facsimile printed output. Switchback Unit This unit has to be installed when the Duplex Unit and/or the Job Separator is equipped with the machine. Built-in Finisher Enables sorting, stapling, hole punching, and folding. Punch Kit Punches holes in the paper. Can be equipped with the Built-in Finisher.

19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Saddle/Folding Kit Enables saddle stapling and folding of pages. Can be equipped with the Built-in Finisher. Cannot be used with the Mail-Bins Kit. Mail-Bin Kit Automatically sorts the printed output from the printer. Can be equipped with the Built-in Finisher. Cannot be used with the Saddle/Folding Kit. Additional Bin Kit This tray automatically sorts the printed output from the printer. Can be equipped with the Built-in Finisher. Mechanical Counter A six-digit counter for printed page count. This is an additional counter to the internal soft counter. Network Interface Card Needed to use the PC printing function and network application function. Also provides a USB interface for local PC printing. Network Application Kit Offers network scanner feature and Internet fax feature. Cannot be used with the Optional Memory Board. Network Application Kit with Memory Offers network scanner feature and Internet fax feature. Includes 96MB memory. Cannot be used with the Optional Memory Board. Printer Controller (PCL) Offers PC printing (PCL) and available network printing. Drivers include integration to available finishing options. Printer Controller (PCL/PS) Offers PC printing (PCL/PS) and available network printing. Drivers include integration to available finishing options. Second G3 Port A second facsimile line can be installed, allowing the convenience and efficiency of simultaneous sending and receiving. TX Marker Stamp Unit The TX Marker stamps a small red mark on the document, showing the user that the individual pages were successfully scanned into memory.

20

Regulatory and Safety Information

Table of Contents
Regulatory and Safety Information
Section 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Regulatory Information .................................................................. 1


FCC Notification ........................................................................................ 1 Industry Canada Notification ..................................................................... 3 Laser Classification and Safety ................................................................. 4 CDRH Regulations .................................................................................... 5 Transmitter Subscribers Identification ...................................................... 6

Section 2
2.1 2.2

Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 7


Installation Space ...................................................................................... 7 Using this Product ..................................................................................... 7

Section 3

Legal Restrictions To Copying .................................................... 15

Chapter 1 Getting Started


Section 1 Section 2 Section 3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Product Overview ........................................................................ 1-1 Names and Functions of Parts ................................................... 1-3 Operation Panel and Touch Panel ............................................. 1-9
Operation Panel ...................................................................................... 1-9 Touch Panel ......................................................................................... 1-12 Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) ........................................................... 1-15 Accessibility Settings Feature ............................................................... 1-22 Account and Account Management Mode ............................................ 1-27

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Section 4 Section 5
5.1 5.2 5.3

How to use the Copier and Facsimile (Auto-mode Screen) .. 1-30 Handling Documents ................................................................ 1-31
Using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) ..................................... 1-31 Using the Book Scanner ....................................................................... 1-32 Notes on Handling Documents ............................................................. 1-33

Section 6 Section 7
7.1

Quitting an Operation ............................................................... 1-36 Interrupting an Operation ......................................................... 1-38


Interrupting ............................................................................................ 1-38

Section 8 Section 9
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5

Confirming the Settings ........................................................... 1-39 Routine Care .............................................................................. 1-53


Installing Print Paper ............................................................................. 1-53 Installing and Replacing the Toner Bottle ............................................. 1-60 Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp . 1-65 Installing and Adding Staples ...............................................................1-67 Cleaning ................................................................................................1-74

Chapter 2 Copy Operations


Section 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6

Basic Copy Operations .............................................................. 2-1


Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder ...................................... 2-2 Copying with the Book Scanner .............................................................. 2-3 Memory Recall ........................................................................................ 2-5 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying ............................................ 2-7 Paper Size Reset .................................................................................. 2-14 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying .................................................. 2-14

ii

Table of Contents

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16

Selecting the Zoom Ratio ..................................................................... 2-15 Zoom Selections Available ................................................................ 2-17

Registering the Zoom Ratio .................................................................. 2-19 Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying ..................................... 2-20 Zoom Ratio Reset ................................................................................. 2-20 Adjusting the Density for Copying ........................................................ 2-20 Making the Choice for Density Selection .............................................. 2-22 Density Setting Reset ........................................................................... 2-22 Copying Figures and Photos ............................................................. 2-23

Image Quality Setting Reset ................................................................. 2-24

Section 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15

Advanced Copy Operations ..................................................... 2-25


Using the Sort Mode While Copying ..................................................... 2-25 Stapled Binding .................................................................................... 2-28 Hole Punching ...................................................................................... 2-32 Setting a Crease ................................................................................... 2-35 Mixed Size Original Document Detection ............................................. 2-37 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig. Copy Screen) ....... 2-39 Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents .............................. 2-46 Selecting the Various Copy Formats .................................................... 2-48 Attaching Cover Sheets to Copies ........................................................ 2-55 Inserting Separators (Page Insertion) ................................................... 2-58 Copying and Overhead Projector Interleaving ...................................... 2-60 Setting Up File Margins ........................................................................ 2-62 Erasing a Portion of the Document ....................................................... 2-64 Repeated Copying on a Single Sheet .................................................. 2-66 Numbering Each Set of Copies ............................................................ 2-69

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

iii

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.16 2.17 2.18 2.19

Printing a Water Mark on the Copy Paper ............................................ 2-71 Black-White Reverse Copying .............................................................. 2-73 Separate Scanning ............................................................................... 2-73 Using Copy Programs ...........................................................................2-76

Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations


Section 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

General Information .................................................................... 3-1


Describing the Registration and Setting Screens ................................... 3-1 User Set Screen ..................................................................................... 3-2 Copy Job Program Recall Screen .......................................................... 3-2 User Management Screen ...................................................................... 3-3 Administrator Management Screen ....................................................... 3-3 Report Screen .........................................................................................3-4 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation .........................3-4 Entering Characters for Registration ...................................................... 3-5

Section 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10

Basic Settings and Registration Operation .............................. 3-7


Basic Settings .........................................................................................3-7 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen ................................. 3-9 Setting the Date and Time ................................................................... 3-10 Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time ................................3-12 Registering the Telephone Number ...................................................... 3-15 Registering the Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) ............... 3-19 Registering the Self-ID .......................................................................... 3-21 Registering the Administrator Number .................................................. 3-22 Setting the Account Management Mode ............................................... 3-24 Registering Accounts ............................................................................ 3-25

iv

Table of Contents

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14

Registering Passwords for Secured Communications ......................... 3-28 Registering One-Touch Keys ............................................................... 3-30 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys ........................................... 3-39 Registering Program Keys .................................................................... 3-41

Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations


Section 1 Section 2
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9

General Information .................................................................... 4-1 Advanced Settings ...................................................................... 4-1


Changing the Initial Settings ................................................................... 4-1 Transmission Settings .......................................................................... 4-26 Setting the Reception Functions ........................................................... 4-35 Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX ................................... 4-37 Setting for Received Documents .......................................................... 4-43 Report Print Settings ............................................................................ 4-54 Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account .................................... 4-56 Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters ...................................... 4-57 Software Switch Settings ...................................................................... 4-60

Section 3
3.1 3.2 3.3

Advanced Registration .............................................................4-79


Establishing a Bulletin Board ................................................................ 4-79 Registering Copy Programs ................................................................. 4-84 Registering the Confidential Box .......................................................... 4-86

Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations


Section 1 Section 2
2.1

General Introduction ................................................................... 5-1 Basic Sending Operations .......................................................... 5-1


Quick Memory Transmission .................................................................. 5-1

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13

Calling the Destination and Transmitting the Document .........................5-5 Selecting the Communications Mode (For optional 2nd G3 Port only)....5-5 Using Full Dialing for International Destinations .....................................5-6 When Transmission is Unsuccessful ...................................................... 5-6 Using One-Touch Dialing ........................................................................ 5-7 Searching the Destination by Name ..................................................... 5-10 Using Program Dialing Keys ................................................................. 5-12 Sending Fine Print and Photos ............................................................. 5-14 Adjusting Contrast ................................................................................ 5-16 Sending Documents without Reduction ................................................ 5-17 Selecting the Scan Area ....................................................................... 5-19 Using Chain Dialing ..............................................................................5-22

Section 3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6

Basic Receiving Operations ..................................................... 5-24


Changing the Reception Mode ............................................................. 5-24 While Receiving a Document ................................................................ 5-25 When the Recording Paper Runs Out .................................................. 5-25 Paper Sizes and Document Formats .................................................... 5-26 When Receiving Long Documents ....................................................... 5-26 Making and Receiving Telephone Calls ............................................... 5-27

Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations


Section 1 Section 2
2.1 2.2 2.3

General Information .................................................................... 6-1 Advanced Transmission Operations ......................................... 6-1


Serial Broadcast Transmission ............................................................... 6-1 Printing TSI Information ..........................................................................6-5 Destination Insertion ............................................................................... 6-6

vi

Table of Contents

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17

Printing the Transmission Report ........................................................... 6-7 2 in 1 Transmission ................................................................................ 6-9 2-Sided Transmission ........................................................................... 6-10 Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Document ................................. 6-14 Priority Transmission ............................................................................ 6-15 Timer Transmission .............................................................................. 6-16 Using the TX Marker ............................................................................. 6-17 Real-Time Transmission ....................................................................... 6-19 Password Transmission ....................................................................... 6-20 Remote Copying ................................................................................... 6-21 F-CODE ................................................................................................ 6-22 Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board ........................................ 6-25 Polling Transmission ............................................................................ 6-29 Manual Reception ................................................................................. 6-31

Section 3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Advanced Reception Operations ............................................. 6-32


Password Reception ............................................................................. 6-32 Selecting Password Reception ............................................................. 6-32 Receive Polling and Start Timer ........................................................... 6-32 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board ........................................................... 6-34

Chapter 7 Reports and Lists


Section 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Reports and Lists ........................................................................ 7-1


Printing the Activity Report (TX) ............................................................. 7-1 Printing the Activity Report (RX) ............................................................. 7-3 Printing the One-Touch Key List ............................................................. 7-4 Printing the FAX Program List ................................................................ 7-6

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

vii

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

Bulletin Board List ...................................................................................7-7 Confirming the Confidential Box Information .......................................... 7-9 Printing the Account List ....................................................................... 7-10 Printing the Setting List ......................................................................... 7-12 Confirming the Condition of Forwarding ............................................... 7-14

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
Section 1
1.1 1.2 1.3

Display Icons and Alarm Messages .......................................... 8-1


Display Icons .......................................................................................... 8-1 Alarm Messages ..................................................................................... 8-2 Document Jam ........................................................................................ 8-7

Section 2 Section 3
3.1 3.2

Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 8-22 Power Failure ............................................................................ 8-27


Documents in Memory are Retained for 12 Hours ............................... 8-27 Registered Items are Retained ............................................................. 8-28

Section 4 Section 5

Dehumidify Function ................................................................ 8-28 Toner Replenishment ............................................................... 8-31

Appendix A Glossary of Terms

viii

Table of Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6 Figure 1-7 Figure 1-8 Figure 1-9 Names and Functions of Parts .......................................................................... 1-3 Open Document Cover ...................................................................................... 1-4 Back View of the NEC IT3520 ........................................................................... 1-5 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency .................................................... 1-6 TX Marker Location ........................................................................................... 1-8 Operation Panel Components ........................................................................... 1-9 Angle Adjustment of Operation Panel ............................................................. 1-11 Touch Panel Display ....................................................................................... 1-12 Account Selection Screen ............................................................................... 1-13

Figure 1-10 Utility Screen ................................................................................................... 1-13 Figure 1-11 Status Display ................................................................................................. 1-14 Figure 1-12 Auto-mode Screen .......................................................................................... 1-16 Figure 1-13 Copy Screen .................................................................................................... 1-17 Figure 1-14 One-Touch Screen .......................................................................................... 1-18 Figure 1-15 Search Screen ................................................................................................. 1-19 Figure 1-16 10-key Dialing Screen ..................................................................................... 1-20 Figure 1-17 Index List Screen ............................................................................................. 1-21 Figure 1-18 Enlarge Display Screen ................................................................................... 1-23 Figure 1-19 Loading the Automatic Document Feeder ....................................................... 1-31 Figure 1-20 Using the Book Scanner .................................................................................. 1-32 Figure 1-21 Placing the Document on the Glass Surface ................................................... 1-33 Figure 1-22 Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes ....................................................... 1-35

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

ix

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Figure 1-23 Pressing the Stop Key ..................................................................................... 1-36 Figure 1-24 Selecting Which Operation to Cancel .............................................................. 1-37 Figure 1-25 Pressing the Panel Reset Key ......................................................................... 1-37 Figure 1-26 Touching Cancel on the Touch Panel ............................................................. 1-38 Figure 1-27 Pressing the Interrupt Key ............................................................................... 1-39 Figure 1-28 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette ....................................................................... 1-54 Figure 1-29 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................ 1-54 Figure 1-30 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-55 Figure 1-31 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette ....................................................................... 1-55 Figure 1-32 Adjusting the Paper Width Guide .................................................................... 1-56 Figure 1-33 Adjusting the Paper Length Guide ................................................................... 1-56 Figure 1-34 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................ 1-57 Figure 1-35 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-57 Figure 1-36 Pushing the Tray Button .................................................................................. 1-58 Figure 1-37 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette ....................................................................... 1-58 Figure 1-38 Loading the Paper Cassette ............................................................................ 1-59 Figure 1-39 Pushing In the Paper Cassette ........................................................................1-59 Figure 1-40 Opening the Toner Bottle Cover ...................................................................... 1-60 Figure 1-41 Pulling the Toner Bottle Lever ......................................................................... 1-60 Figure 1-42 Pulling Out the Toner Bottle Tray .................................................................... 1-61 Figure 1-43 Raising the Toner Holder .................................................................................1-61 Figure 1-44 Removing the Old Toner Bottle ....................................................................... 1-62 Figure 1-45 Gently Shake the New Toner Bottle ................................................................ 1-62 Figure 1-46 Turn the Bottle to Loosen the Toner ................................................................ 1-62 Figure 1-47 Inserting the New Toner Bottle ........................................................................1-63

List of Figures

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 1-48 Inserting the New Toner Bottle ........................................................................ 1-63 Figure 1-49 Lowering the Toner Bottle Holder .................................................................... 1-64 Figure 1-50 Closing the Toner Cover ................................................................................. 1-64 Figure 1-51 Lifting the Document Feeder Cover ................................................................ 1-65 Figure 1-52 Opening the Document Guide Plate ................................................................ 1-65 Figure 1-53 Removing the Used Marker ............................................................................. 1-66 Figure 1-54 Installing a New Marker ................................................................................... 1-66 Figure 1-55 Closing the Document Guide Plate ................................................................. 1-66 Figure 1-56 Lowering the Document Feeder Cover ........................................................... 1-67 Figure 1-57 Opening the Front Unit Cover ......................................................................... 1-67 Figure 1-58 Opening the Finisher Cover ............................................................................ 1-68 Figure 1-59 Removing the Staple Holder ........................................................................... 1-68 Figure 1-60 Pushing Staple Holder Buttons ....................................................................... 1-69 Figure 1-61 Removing the Empty Cartridge ....................................................................... 1-69 Figure 1-62 Inserting the New Staple Cartridge ................................................................. 1-69 Figure 1-63 Installing the Refilled Staple Holder ................................................................ 1-70 Figure 1-64 Closing the Finisher Cover .............................................................................. 1-70 Figure 1-65 Closing the Front Cover .................................................................................. 1-70 Figure 1-66 Removing a Staple Jam .................................................................................. 1-71 Figure 1-67 Cleaning the External Surfaces ....................................................................... 1-74 Figure 1-68 Displaying the Panel Cleaning Screen ............................................................ 1-75 Figure 1-69 Panel Cleaning Mode ...................................................................................... 1-75 Figure 1-70 Cleaning the Touch Panel ............................................................................... 1-76 Figure 1-71 Reset the Touch Panel Screen ....................................................................... 1-76 Figure 1-72 Opening the Document Cover ......................................................................... 1-77

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

xi

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Figure 1-73 Cleaning Areas ................................................................................................1-78 Figure 1-74 Clean White Parts ............................................................................................ 1-79 Figure 1-75 Closing the Document Cover ...........................................................................1-80 Figure 1-76 Lifting the Document Hopper ...........................................................................1-81 Figure 1-77 Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers .............................................................. 1-81 Figure 1-78 Cleaning the Lower Rollers ............................................................................. 1-82 Figure 1-79 Closing the Hopper and Hopper Cover ........................................................... 1-82 Figure 1-80 Opening the Front Cover .................................................................................1-83 Figure 1-81 Opening the Finisher Cover ............................................................................. 1-83 Figure 1-82 Pulling Out the Dust Box .................................................................................1-83 Figure 1-83 Discarding the Hole Punch Dust ...................................................................... 1-84 Figure 1-84 Putting the Dust Box Back into Place .............................................................. 1-84 Figure 1-85 Closing the Finisher Cover ..............................................................................1-85 Figure 1-86 Closing the Front Cover ................................................................................... 1-85 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 6-1 Figure 7-1 Figure 7-2 Figure 7-3 Figure 7-4 Main Utility Screen ............................................................................................. 3-1 User Set Screen ................................................................................................ 3-2 Copy Job Program Recall Screen ..................................................................... 3-2 User Management Screen ................................................................................. 3-3 Administrator Management Screens .................................................................3-3 Report Screen ................................................................................................... 3-4 TX Marker Position ..........................................................................................6-19 Activity Report (TX) Example ............................................................................ 7-2 Activity Report (RX) Example ............................................................................ 7-4 One-Touch Key List Example ............................................................................ 7-5 FAX Program List Example ............................................................................... 7-7

xii

List of Figures

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 7-5 Figure 7-6 Figure 7-7 Figure 7-8 Figure 7-9 Figure 8-1

Bulletin Board List Example .............................................................................. 7-9 Confidential List Example ................................................................................ 7-10 Account List Example ...................................................................................... 7-12 Setting List Example ........................................................................................ 7-13 Forward List Example ...................................................................................... 7-15 Memory Clear Report Example ....................................................................... 8-28

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

xiii

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

xiv

List of Figures

List of Tables
Table 1-1 Table 2-1 Table 2-2 Table 2-3 Table 2-4 Table 2-5 Table 8-1 Table 8-2 Standard Icons ............................................................................................................ 1-14 Sorting / Grouping with Options .................................................................................. 2-27 Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set .................................................................. 2-32 Hole Punching Position ............................................................................................... 2-34 Examples of Copying Mixed Documents ..................................................................... 2-37 Mixed Original Detection Mode Allowable Size Combinations .................................... 2-38 Display Icons ................................................................................................................. 8-1 Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................ 8-2

NEC IT3510/IT2510 Operations Manual

xv

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

xvi

List of Tables

Chapter 1

Getting Started

SECTION 1

PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The IT20Series, including the IT3520 and IT2520 products, provide full network integration. The series offers a full complement of features including digital copying and document finishing accessories, facsimile, network printing, E-mail integration, network faxing, network scanning, and IP transport. This section presents the IT20Series features and functions. Both units offer corporate workgroups and satellite offices a comprehensive solution for information and centralized document capabilities. Starting with the 35 page per minute (IT3520) and 25 page per minute (IT2520) print speed, and continuing with their 80 page duplex scanning speed, the foundation is built for your customers total document solution. Among the standard copier features are: 32 MB memory and 600 dpi resolution, offering outstanding copy quality for the most demanding applications. Also included are Memory Recall, Page Insertion, Distribution Numbering, Edge Adjustment, 150-page Multi-purpose Bypass Tray, and Image Repeat. A full line of finishing features are also available. Stapling, hole punching, saddle stitching, watermarks, page insertion separation, rotation sorting, and covers allow your NEC IT20Series unit to become a document publication center. Duplex printing and duplex scanning round-out this impressive line-up of features, available on both units. The NEC IT Series also offers you a full line of upgrade options: dual ports, network printing and network extensions allow for a life-long upgrade path for the products. As a hub facsimile unit, the digital IT20Series offers a standard Facsimile function. Leading-edge facsimile features and functions include: Quick Memory Transmission, dual-port upgrade path, 32 MB of standard facsimile memory, double-sided original transmission, 540 location auto-dial, sub-addressing, and a fully integrated touch screen. NEC America, Inc. offers the upgrade path to fit your customers needs. The Pi20Series Printer Controller and Network Interface Card support the popular network protocols, including the 100Base-T. PCL6 is available on the Pi3520 Printer Controller, and a PostScript emulation is available with the Pi3522 Printer Controller. NEC offers both, and allows the customer to select which is best for them! With the

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

NEC IT20Series and Network Printer, your solution delivers document printing, finishing, and digital copier functionality from their desktop throughout the entire network. An Ei3520 Network Applications Kit is also available for the NEC IT20Series. This technical innovation allows the NEC IT20Series to evolve into your customers Internet/Intranet communications network, providing several application opportunities. The Ei3520 Network Applications include: Network Fax - offers clients on the network to fax from their desktop through the IT3520. E-mail Transmission - users no longer need to scan an image into their PC to e-mail it. Simply load the document into the NEC IT3520, dial the destination e-mail address, and send the e-mail message directly from the unit. Scan to E-mail - scan directly into your e-mail box on your PC and the IT20Series unit can convert the scanned image to TIFF or PDF file format. The e-mail message arrives with the scanned image as an attached file, so it can be opened, viewed, saved, or inserted into another application. Scan to File - the Ei3520 also provides an IP scanner application as well as conversion of paper documents to file format. A One-Touch key can be registered to scan directly into a predetermined file on a PC in TIFF or PDF format. Also, a registered key, in the IT20Series, can be set up on the PC for scanning to the PCs selected file. Document Forwarding - automatically forward communications to the IT20Series unit to a Client PC e-mail or fax unit. Forward all received documents to where they need to go, where another copy is needed, or where a person can share the information. Archive Distribution - automatically archive all communications to a Client PC. Now all fax receptions can automatically be forwarded to a Client PC for security, validation, and storage. IP Transmission - send at network speed from one NEC ITSeries unit to another. Your documents are sent at 600 dpi for original-like quality and, by using your Intranet, provides security for your sensitive document communications. Internet Fax - send your documents via Internet fax to another Internet-compatible facsimile device to save telephone usage costs.

Finally, the Ei3520 Network Application offers an Agent features that provides administration management of the NEC IT20Series unit via the Internet/Intranet. A dual-port feature offers two V.34 modems supplying 33.6K bps lines with JBIG coding. This, in effect, doubles the units facsimile communications applications. You can offer dual communications for high-volume, time-saving, and cost-saving solutions.

1-2

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 2

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS


This section names and explains the basic functions of various parts of the product. For a description of the operation panel, refer to Section 3 Operation Panel and Touch Panel on page 1-9.

Duplexing Document Feeder (Automatic Document Feeder) Document Feeder Cover Print Lamp

Holds the document when feeding.

Document Feed Tray

Green during printing, red if a print alarm is generated

Document Cover

Adjustable to the width of the document

Document Guide Plate

To be opened for using the book scanner

Stopper

Touch Panel

The stopper prevents long scanned pages from sliding off the unit

User interface for entering and registering information

Operation Panel Exit Tray


Print paper exits the printer in this area

Document Exit Tray


Scanned pages are fed out here

Power Switch Cover

The power switch is covered to prevent accidental shut off

Toner Bottle Cover Side Covers


Can be opened to remove a paper jam

Paper Level Indication

When the paper runs out, the indicator turns red to alert

Multi-purpose Bypass Tray Paper Feed Cabinet (option)

When cycling the power switch from on to off, wait for 10 seconds before turning the switch to on again.
Figure 1-1 Names and Functions of Parts

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Document Cover Document Pad Document Scanning Area

Glass Surface Book Scanner


With the document cover opened, a document or book is placed on the glass surface in order to be transmitted or copied

Figure 1-2 Open Document Cover

1-4

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Standard Machine
Connector for an extra telephone set Socket for the LAN cable (option). It can be used with the Network Interface Card. USB Connector for printer (option). Refer to the PC printer manual for details.

Line Connector (for fax line)

Before connecting an extra telephone set, check that it can be used on the type of telephone line installed. Some types of telephones may be unusable. For details, contact your service agent or dealer.

For Optional 2nd G3 Port


Second G3 Line Connector 1 (for fax line)

Second G3 Line Connector 2 (for fax line)

Power Inlet

Ground Terminal

Figure 1-3 Back View of the NEC IT3520

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Job Separator

Documents from the copier, printer, or facsimile are automatically sorted

Pull the lever to remove the paper from the Job Separator.

Care should be taken when removing the paper from the tray. It is possible to cut your hand with the paper, or to hit your hand on the bottom of the Operation Panel when the panel is in the tilted position.
Figure 1-4 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency

1-6

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Mail Bin Kit

Documents from the Printed pages from the PC printer are automatically sorted in each bin for a person or the group

Built-in Finisher

Printed pages from facsimile, printers, or copier are automatically sorted. Documents can be stapled and/ or hole-punched.

Duplex Unit

Allows printing on both sides of paper

Large Capacity Cabinet

Up to 2500 sheets of print paper capacity

Saddle/Folding Kit
Printed pages from facsimile or printer are automatically sorted

Additional Bin Kit


Printed pages from facsimile or printer are automatically sorted

Paper Feed Cabinet

Figure 1-5 Optional Equipment for Additional Efficiency (continued)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

TX Marker Stamp Unit

Marks each sheet, confirming that it has successfully been scanned

Figure 1-5 TX Marker Location

1-8

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 3

OPERATION PANEL AND TOUCH PANEL

3.1

Operation Panel The Operation Panel is used for entering information into the unit and for machine operation. The Touch Panel allows the operator to easily and efficiently register data into the unit.

Mode Check

Utility Fax/Mail/Scan Copy Preset Scan

Pause

Access Interrupt

Panel Reset Contrast Touch Panel Enlarge Display Settings


Figure 1-6 Operation Panel Components

Stop Start 10-key Pad

Clear

Key Name

Function

Copy

Press this key to copy. When this lamp is lit, the copy functions are available. Press this key to send a facsimile, e-mail, or scan a document. When this lamp is lit, the facsimile or scanning functions are available for use. Press this key to use the IP Scanner function. Press this key to enable the account management mode.

Fax/Mail/Scan Preset Scan Access

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Key Name

Function

Interrupt Panel Reset Utility Mode Check

Press this key to interrupt an operation in progress. The lamp will stay lit during the interrupt process. Press this key to reset the touch panel settings. Press this key for registration and to make settings. Press this key to confirm the setting status of each function. Press this key to insert a preset pause of three seconds when dialing a telephone number. A pause is needed, in certain cases, to enter additional numbers such as account numbers, passwords, etc. The pause key can also be used when registering One-Touch keys. Press these keys to enter a facsimile telephone number, number of copies desired, or other data to be registered. Pressing this key will reset the number of copies entered to "1". Pressing this key will also clear any data entered when dialing a number or registering information. Press this key to begin copying, transmission of a facsimile, or reception of a facsimile after talking (manual reception). Copy and transmission are available while the lamp is green. When the lamp is orange, copying and transmission are not available. Press this key to stop an operation, such as transmission or copying. This is not the same as using the interrupt key, which temporarily suspends an operation. Press this key to activate Accessibility settings. Press this key to enlarge the touch panel display. Press this key to adjust light and shade contrast of the touch panel display.

Pause

10-key Pad

C (Clear)

Start

Stop

Settings Enlarge Display Contrast

1 - 10

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

The angle of the Operation Panel can be adjusted for three levels. Pull the lever to adjust the panel angle.

Figure 1-7 Angle Adjustment of Operation Panel

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3.2

Touch Panel The Touch Panel is used to specify the functions of the copier and facsimile, as well as to register information for various functions.

1 - 12

Examples of touch panel screens shown in this manual may differ slightly from the actual display due to software modifications.

Supplementary Function Keys Message zone

Keys

Status and Alarm zone


Figure 1-8 Touch Panel Display

Keys / Function Tabs Keys and tabs, such as [Density] and [Orig. Copy], are used to select operations. By touching different keys and tabs copy and facsimile functions and registration menus can be selected. One type of key changes the actual screen when touched, while another type selects a desired function. In the latter case, the key changes from normal (dark letters on a white background) to inverted (white letters on a dark background) when touched. Message The message area further explains an operational procedure, such as [Ready to copy]. Status Display zone This area displays icons indicating the volume of memory used and the equipment status. Alarm Display zone This area displays icons warning the user of machine problems such as no print paper installed, a paper jam, or a communication error, etc.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Details of the Main Screens Account Selection Screen This screen is displayed when the Account Management Mode has been enabled and is used to the track machine usage by an account. The operator must select their accounts before using the machine. When the Account Management Mode is open, this screen is displayed when <ID> is pressed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Figure 1-9 Account Selection Screen

Utility Screen This screen is used to set various options, register items such as facsimile numbers, date and time, etc., and to print reports.

Figure 1-10 Utility Screen

1 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Status Display While the unit is performing an operation, its status is indicated by icons located at the bottom of the touch panel. Refer to Figure 1-11 Status Display. Table 1-1 Standard Icons shows the icons displayed during normal machine operation. For a complete list of icons used, refer to Section 1.1 Display Icons in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 8-1.

1 - 14

Icon zone

Figure 1-11 Status Display

Table 1-1 Icons

Standard Icons Description

Dialing Dial Wait Copying Scanning Receiving Sending

Now dialing a destination Waiting to redial a destination Now copying Now scanning a facsimile page Now receiving a facsimile Now sending a facsimile

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Automatic Display Time-out If a selected screen, such as a menu screen, is left open the touch panel automatically returns to the initial screen after a user-set time period. Either the facsimile screen or the copier screen can be set as the default display. For details on setting the default display, refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4. Automatic Back-light The touch panel automatically turns off to save power and conserve screen life. To enable the panel back-light, simply touch anywhere on the panel surface. When printing is stopping (waiting to be printed), the power save function (Energy Save Mode, Sleep Mode) wont work.

3.3

Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) The screen which is displayed when the equipment is ready to begin operations for copying, facsimile activity, and registration, is called the standby screen. The stand-by screen can be set from four types to suit the way you normally use the machine. The four stand-by screen choices are: Auto-mode Screen (default screen set at factory) Copy Screen Facsimile Screen Scanner Screen (option)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

For details on setting the stand-by screen, refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4. Auto-mode Screen This screen is used for both facsimile and copy operations without specifying which function is used.

1 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Facsimile numbers registered for One-Touch keys 1~4 and copy program key 1 are displayed in this zone.

Figure 1-12 Auto-mode Screen

When the 10-key Pad is used to enter a figure of four digits or more (three digits for the IT2520), or a figure starting with 0, "*", or "#" and <Start> is pressed, the equipment automatically determines it to be a facsimile number and begins transmission. When a three-digit number or less (a two-digit number for the IT2520) is entered, the equipment determines this the number of copies required and begins copying. When <Copy> is pressed, the copy menu screen is displayed. To select the copy function, press the <Copy> key. When <Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed, the facsimile menu screen is displayed. To select the facsimile function, press the <Fax/Mail/Scan> key. When the Auto-mode screen has been selected as the default screen, pressing the <Panel Reset> key twice, while in the copy or facsimile menu screens, will return you to the Auto-mode screen.

1 - 16

Copy Screen This screen is used to select various copying functions. If this equipment is mainly used as a copier, this screen can be set as the default stand-by screen.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 1-13 Copy Screen

When <Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed on the operation panel, the facsimile menu screen is displayed. To select the various facsimile functions, press the <Fax/Mail/Scan> key.

FAX Screen This screen is used to select the facsimile functions. If this equipment is used mainly as a facsimile unit, it may be convenient to set this screen as the default stand-by screen. The facsimile number selection screen displayed first can be selected from the following: One-Touch numbers screen (factory default screen) 10-key Dialing screen Index List screen

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

For details on changing the default screen, refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4.

1 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

One-Touch Screen This screen displays numbers that have been registered in advance for One-Touch dialing.

Figure 1-14 One-Touch Screen

There are 36 One-Touch screens in total, and up to 540 numbers can be registered (15 numbers per screen x 36 screens = 540 numbers total). When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu is displayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function. When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed. When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the Dial Input screen is displayed. When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmission image quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed. When [FAX Menu] is touched, the communications parameters is displayed. screen setting various

1 - 18

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Search Screen This screen is used to search the destinations by name.

Figure 1-15 Search Screen

By pressing <Copy> on the operation panel, the copy menu is displayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function. When [One-Touch] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed. When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the Dial Input screen is displayed. When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmission image quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed. When [FAX Menu] is touched, the communications parameters is displayed. screen setting various

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

When [Search] is touched, the screen for searching the destinations name by spelling is displayed.

1 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

10-key Dialing Screen Use this screen to enter a facsimile number by using the 10-key dialing pad.

Figure 1-16 10-key Dialing Screen

When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu is displayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function. When [One-Touch] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed. When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed. When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmission image quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed. When [FAX Menu] is touched, the communications parameters is displayed. screen setting various

1 - 20

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Index List Screen This screen displays an index list for classifying the One-Touch keys. The Index List makes for a convenient way to organize the previously registered One-Touch keys into handy categories or titles.

Figure 1-17 Index List Screen

There are 36 index keys in total, and up to 15 One-Touch keys can be registered per index key. When <Copy> on the operation panel is pressed, the copy menu is displayed. Press <Copy> to select the copy function. When [Enter] is touched, the One-Touch screen is displayed. When [Search] is touched, the Search screen is displayed. When [10-key Dialing] is touched, the dial input screen is displayed. When [Quality & Reduction] is touched, the facsimile transmission image quality, contrast, and reduction screen is displayed. When [FAX Menu] is touched, the communications parameters is displayed. screen setting various

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3.4

Accessibility Settings Feature You may adjust the mode of the Touch Panel display, or the volume of the alarm to suit your convenience. Accessibility Settings Feature
Key Name Function

Enlarge Display Screen Mode Key Speed Settings Confirming Screen Notification Screen Sound Setting

Press this key to enlarge the panel display. Touch this key to indicate the screen mode. The Touch Panel display may reverse black/white. Touch this key to adjust the time of the key speed settings for [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys. Touch this key to extend the length of time that the Touch Panel display goes back to the stand-by screen. Touch this key to extend the length of time for the notification screen, which shows up after pressing <Start> for the Fax/Copy operation. Touch this key to adjust the volume of the key-touch sound or alarms. The volume can be set louder.

Enlarge Display

Touch <Enlarge Display> to enlarge the Touch Panel display. Touch <Enlarge Display> again to go back to the normal display. You may operate the Touch Panel in the enlarged mode.

1 - 22

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Touch this arrow to scroll up.

Touch this area to scroll up and left. Touch this arrow to scroll left. When you reach the left end, it will shift to the right end of the line above. Touch this area to scroll down and left.

Touch this area to scroll up and right.

Touch this arrow to scroll right. When you reach the right end, it will shift to the left end of the next line.

Touch this area to scroll down and right. Touch this arrow to scroll down.

Figure 1-18 Enlarge Display Screen

Accessibility Settings Screen

Set the user settings on the Accessibility Settings feature screen. Touch the <Settings> button to indicate settings screen. If various settings are already programmed, those settings will be activated by touching <Settings>, and the <Settings> button will light green. When the Accessibility Settings feature is active, [Set] is highlighted. Touch [Reset] to cancel the Accessibility Settings feature and go back to the original screen. (<Settings> button lamp will turn off.)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Screen Mode

Touch [Screen Mode] to indicate the screen mode. The Touch Panel display may reverse black/white. Touch [Inverted Screen] to invert the color of the Touch Panel display.

1 - 24

Touch [Normal Screen] to go back to the normal display.

Key Speed Settings

Touch [Key Speed Settings] to display this screen. By setting up the key speed, it is possible to select the key and move the cursor continuously. This setting is for touching the [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys. Set the delay time (how many seconds you need to keep touching the [ ][ ][ ][ ] key on the screen [such as selecting the destinations or setting the functions] before turning into the key repeat mode), and interval time (how many seconds needed to keep touching the [ ][ ][ ][ ] key on the screen [such as selecting the destinations or setting the functions] to move the cursor).

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Example: When you keep touching [ ] on the screen, such as TEL. NO. selecting screen. (The speed of the cursors movement is set.)

Keep touching the [Check] to confirm the set for Key Speed Settings. Confirming Screen

Touch [Confirming Screen] to display this screen. The NEC IT 3520/ IT2520 is configured so the Touch Panel display goes back to the standby screen automatically if there is no command given for a certain period of time (default configuration: one minute).

If you activate the Accessibility Settings feature, you may set it to extend the duration time for the Confirmation screen to last before going back to the stand-by screen.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Touch [ ] and [

] to set these times.

1 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Select from [30 sec], [60 sec], [90 sec.], or [120 sec] to extend the length of time for the Confirmation screen to last. Touch [None] to go back to the standby screen without extending the duration time. Notification Screen. Touch the [Notification Screen] to display this screen:

The NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is configured to indicate the Notification screen for three seconds, to confirm the destination and document number, before fax/copy is started. If you activate the Accessibility Settings feature, you may extend the duration time for the Notification screen. Select [3 sec], [10 sec], or [60 sec] to extend the duration time for the Notification screen. Touch [No Limit] to continue the Notification Screen to last until [Enter] is touched on the Notification screen.

1 - 26

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Sound Setting Touch [Sound Setting] to display the screen.

You may adjust the volume of the key-touch sound by five levels in the normal default configuration. If you activate the Accessibility Settings feature, you may set these volumes to be louder. Select either [Default] or [Loud] to set the volume.

3.5

Different settings can be saved for each account of the machine. Accounts are defined as individual persons using the unit, or accounts can be separate departments using the machine. Unauthorized machine usage is prevented by pre-registering approved accounts.
Accounts:
Those persons who are registered in the IT3520/IT2520 are called Accounts. Refer to Section 2.10 Registering Accounts in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-25. Accounts are registered using the Administrator Management screen. Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9. Registered accounts data can be amended by the accounts. Refer to Section 2.10 Registering Accounts in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-25.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Account and Account Management Mode

Account Management Mode:


The usage status for each account can be confirmed. Unauthorized use of the machine can be prevented by registering a password for each account. Refer to Section 2.7 Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-56.

1 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

When Accounts are to be Restricted: Registration / Settings Before Use


Account Management Mode Account Registration Password Registration

When accounts are restricted by passwords When accounts are not restricted by passwords

When used with common settings When used with individual settings

1. 2.

1 - 28

Operation When Used


Account Selection Operation Password Input

Limited

Required

Yes

Required

Required

Limited

Required

No

Required

Not Required

When Accounts are Not Restricted: Registration / Settings Before Use


Account Management Mode Open Account Registration Not Required Required Required Password Registration

Operation When Used


Account Selection Operation Not Required Password Input Not Required Not Required Required

Open Open

No Yes

Required Required

Account Selection

Press <Access>. Select the Account.


When specified by Account Number:
Touch [Account #] and use the 10-key Pad to enter the number.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Account Selection (Continued)

3.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Account Number (six digits).

4.

Press <Access>. The stand-by screen is now displayed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

When no account number is registered, the stand-by screen is displayed instead.

Account Management Mode is now active, and the Account operating icon will be displayed.

After Completing Copying or Transmission: When users are restricted, <Access> must be pressed once the task is completed. This prevents unauthorized usage after the current operation is finished. When <Access> is pressed, all settings for copy and facsimile functions are reset, and the display returns to either the Account selection screen or the stand-by screen.

1 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

SECTION 4

HOW TO USE THE COPIER AND FACSIMILE (AUTO-MODE SCREEN)


The Auto-mode screen can be switched between setting the number of copies needed and the facsimile destination by simply entering the appropriate numbers. When this Auto-mode screen is displayed, the product can be used without selecting the copy or facsimile screens.

Press the <Fax/Mail/ Scan> key

Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Refer to Chapter 2 Copy Operations

Telephone number (facsimile)

1 - 30

serugif htiw tupni stes fo rebmun eht ypoC

.)ssel ro( rebmun tigid-owt a retnE :0252TI .)ssel ro( rebmun tigid-eerht a retnE :0253TI

gniypoC

snoitcnuf ypoc suoirav gnisU yek tratS eht sserP srebmun retne ot daP yek-01 eht esU tnemucoD eht daoL neercS edom-otuA
Press the <Copy> key
Number of sets to be copied

serugif htiw tupni noitanitsed eht ot dettimsnart si elimiscaF

.0 morf gnitrats serugif ro ,)erom ro( rebmun tigid-eerht a retnE :0252TI .0 morf gnitrats serugif ro ,)erom ro( rebmun tigid-ruof a retnE :0253TI

yek tratS eht sserP

snoitcnuf elimiscaf suoirav gnisU noissimsnart elimiscaF

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 5

HANDLING DOCUMENTS
This section provides information on correctly handling documents for transmission or copying. Document pages may be inserted in two different ways. For additional details, refer to Section 5.3 Notes on Handling Documents on page 1-33.
Before Starting Operations:
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) feeds document pages one-by-one, when transmitting and copying. Pages are away placed information side up, will scan from the top page down, and will exit the ADF in their original order. The Book Scanner is used when transmitting or copying documents that cannot be handled by the ADF, such as books, catalogs, and bound materials.

5.1

Using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 1. Place the document face up at the left side of the Document Feed Tray. 2. Position the document firmly against the left of the document hopper and adjust the Document Guide Plates to the width of the pages. 3. Insert the document pages gently until they reach their initial edge and stop inside the feeder.

Place the document face up in the feeder.

Stopper

Figure 1-19 Loading the Automatic Document Feeder

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

5.2

Using the Book Scanner 1. Open the Document Cover and place the document face down and flush with the glass surface. 2. Position the document in the top left-hand corner of the glass surface. 3. For transmission, the document should be placed with its longer side against the back edge of the glass surface. If placed with the shorter side against the back, the entire document may be reduced when transmitted. 4. When [Book] on the [Orig. Copy] is used, adjust the center of the document to the mark on the Book Scanner.
Bookscanner mark

5. Close the Document cover before beginning transmission or copying.

Place the book, magazine, etc. in the top left-hand corner

Figure 1-20 Using the Book Scanner

1 - 32

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Longer side against the back.

Shorter side against the back.

Figure 1-21 Placing the Document on the Glass Surface

5.3

Notes on Handling Documents Please observe these important points concerning handling documents. When Documents are placed in the ADF Adjust the document guide plates to the width of the document pages. Remove all paper clips and staples from the documents. If a document has cut-and-paste or taped attachments, only the Book Scanner should be used. Scanning these pages in the ADF may cause a jam condition or affect the image quality. Do not use the ADF for scanning pages containing tape flags, as this may cause a jam condition or affect image quality. Ensure that any correction fluid or ink has dried before inserting the pages into the ADF. Do not open the Document Feed Cover while the ADF is in use. This will cause the ADF scanning operation to be suspended. Ensure that no pages are left on the Book Scanner glass. The ADF will not operate with a page left on the Book Scanner glass.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

When Documents are placed on the Book Scanner Ensure that any correction fluid or ink has dried before inserting the pages on the glass surface.

1 - 33

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

When scanning a book, or thick document, do not force the document cover to close. Excessive force may cause damage to the door. Ensure that no pages remain in the ADF. The Book Scanner will not operate until these pages are removed. Certain document sizes may not be automatically detected. In these cases, the size must be manually selected. For details, refer to Section 2.12 Selecting the Scan Area in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-19. Documents that may not be capable of automatic size detection: Dark documents Transparencies, such as over-head projector sheets and tracing paper Unusually shaped or long documents Documents with raised (embossed) characters Documents smaller than Letter size (portrait or landscape) Documents larger than Ledger (11" by 17") size. When used with the Document Cover open

Open cover to at least 15

1 - 34

 

    

If the paper being scanned is very thin, marks on the Document Cover may affect image quality. In this case, place a blank sheet of the same size over the page to be scanned. If the document is not a standard size (i.e., Letter or Legal) the machine will choose the nearest standard size paper. For correct page size detection to take place, the Document Cover must be opened to at least 15.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Do not place anything heavier than 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on the glass surface. Avoid looking at the Book Scanning area when scanning takes place, as a very bright light is used. Use the Book Scanner for copying or transmitting thin paper (11 lbs) or excessively thick paper (heavier than 22 lbs). Close the Document Cover slowly.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes Document sizes from 5" by 3.9" to 11.6" by 39.3" can be scanned when using the ADF. If a document is of an irregular size, the size limits that can be scanned are shown in Figure 1-22 Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes.

The machine puts an outer margin of 0.39" (10 mm) around the page edge.

Figure 1-22 Maximum and Minimum Document Sizes

Any size of up to Ledger (11" by 17") can be copied or transmitted using the Book Scanner.

Maximum Number of Pages in the ADF Up to 80 pages can be loaded in the ADF at a time. Paper weights of between 14 lbs. and 22 lbs. may be used.

1 - 35

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmitting Ledger sized Documents When a Ledger (11" by 17") document is transmitted, it is automatically reduced according to the paper sizes available in the receiving facsimile. To send Ledger size pages in their original size, select Nonreduced Transmission. For additional details, refer to Section 2.11 Sending Documents without Reduction in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-17. Ledger (11"x17") Legal (8.5"x14")

SECTION 6

QUITTING AN OPERATION
This section describes how to quit an operation in progress. Press the <Stop> Key

1 - 36

Original (senders) paper size Destination units paper sizes Ledger (11" by 17") Legal Letter

Original size Reduced to legal Reduced to letter

Original size Original size Reduced to letter

Figure 1-23 Pressing the Stop Key

Press the <Stop> key when setting functions or registering information. When the machine is operating, the function that is currently being used is displayed on the touch panel, so that key may be touched to stop that particular function.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

If the <Stop> key is pressed while copying, operation is halted. When halted, copying may be resumed by pressing the <Start> key.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Figure 1-24 Selecting Which Operation to Cancel

Pressing the <Panel Reset> key and all settings for copy and facsimile functions are cleared.

Figure 1-25 Pressing the Panel Reset Key

1 - 37

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

The registration or setting screen can be canceled by touching [Cancel] when [Cancel] is displayed on either screen. When [Cancel] is touched, the data which is being registered or setting is cleared.

SECTION 7

INTERRUPTING AN OPERATION

7.1

Copying or printing operations can be suspended to allow other documents to be copied or transmitted.
Before Starting Operations:
Interruption is not possible during document scanning for transmission. When a facsimile is received while operation is interrupted, the received data is stored in memory without being printed. For more details, refer to Section 1.3 Memory Recall in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-5. Sorting, grouping, stapling, and hole punching cannot be used when an operation is interrupted. The Interrupt key lamp is lit while an operation is being interrupted.

1 - 38

Figure 1-26 Touching Cancel on the Touch Panel

Interrupting

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

How to Interrupt an Operation 1. Press the <Interrupt> key.

2. Copy or transmit the document.

3. Press <Interrupt>. 4. The machine will return to the pre-interrupted status.

SECTION 8

CONFIRMING THE SETTINGS


Communications and copier settings can be confirmed by using the Mode Check key.
Before Starting Operations:
The <Mode Check> button on the operation panel will be used to confirm the settings. Two confirmation categories exist:

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

To cancel the selection press <Interrupt> once again.

Figure 1-27 Pressing the Interrupt Key

To copy a document, press <Copy>.


To send a facsimile, press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. For more information, refer to Section 1 Basic Copy Operations in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-1, and Section 2 Basic Sending Operations in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-1.

The interrupted operation can be continued.

1 - 39

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Facsimile Destination confirmation screen: The specified destination can be confirmed and modified. Quality/Reduction confirmation screen: The settings for image quality, density, reduction, and scanning area can be confirmed and modified. FAX Menu confirmation screen: FAX Menu settings can be confirmed and reset. Copying Settings confirmation screen: The copy functions that have been set can be confirmed. The settings can also be reset or cancelled. Functions that have been set in advance can be registered into copy program keys.
Confirming Facsimile Settings

1.

Press <Mode Check> on the FAX screen.

2.

Confirm the settings.

1 - 40

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming Facsimile Settings (Continued)

1. Touch [Destination] to confirm the number.

Confirming the Quality Screen Settings

1.

Touch [Quality] to confirm the settings.

Confirm settings:
The current settings are displayed above each key.

To modify settings:
Touch the key for the function to be modified and change the setting.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i i i i

When <Mode Check> is pressed, this screen is displayed initially. When multiple destinations are selected:
Up to four numbers can be displayed at a time. If some numbers are not displayed, touch [ ] [ ] to check them.

Description of the screen:


This icon indicates a number selection by a One-Touch key.

To add destinations:
Touch [Add Dest.] select number. to

This icon indicates a number entered by the 10-key Pad.

To delete a destination:
Select the key for the number to be deleted, then touch [Delete].

To confirm the communications mode, etc.:


Select the key for the number to be confirmed, and touch [Detail].

1 - 41

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the FAX Menu Settings

1.

Touch [FAX Menu] to confirm the settings.

2. 1. 2.

Confirming the Copy Settings

3.

1 - 42

i i i i i

The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions.


It is illegal to turn off this feature!

Confirming settings:
The key for a function that has been selected is displayed in reverse.

To cancel settings:
Touch the key for the function to be canceled. The appearance of the key returns to normal.

Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the FAX screen.

Press <Mode Check> on the Copy screen. Confirm the settings.


There are four types of confirmation screens
When [Next] is touched, the screen changes to the next one. When [Back] is touched, it returns to the previous screen.

To register a copy program:


Touch [Job Mem Input] to register the functions that have been selected in a copy program.

Refer to Section 3.2 Registering Copy Programs in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-84.

Touch [Exit]. The display returns to the Copy screen.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming the Results of Fax Transmission, Status of Printing Jobs, and Saved Documents Confirm the status of operation for the device, order of the pending printing jobs, results of fax transmission, and documents saved in the bulletin board or confidential box on the Touch Panel. Before Starting the Operations The Job List screen is divided into the following five categories: Job: Print Order: Touch [Job] to display the functions under operations. Touch [Print Order] to display the order (maximum of eight jobs) of printing, including documents for copy/received-fax/report printout/ PC printout, etc. Touch [Print] to display the status of the printing operation for the documents for copy/PC printout. Touch [Com.] to display the status of the send-fax and receivedfax documents.
Type of Document Documents Now Sending/To Be Sent Documents Sent Documents Now Receiving/To Be Printed Documents Received Maximum Number of Indicated Documents 200 96 200 256

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Print: Com.:

Doc.:

Touch [Doc.] to display the documents that are saved in the NEC IT 3520/IT2520.

Bulletin Board:Touch [Bulletin Board] to display the documents registered in the bulletin board. You may print/delete the documents registered in the bulletin board. Confidential: Touch [Confidential] to display the documents saved in the confidential box. You may print/delete documents saved in the confidential box. Public: Touch [Public] to display the public documents saved in the document reception manager. You may print/transfer/delete documents saved.

1 - 43

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Displaying the Job List

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Confirm the active function.

3.

4.

1 - 44

Confirming the status:


Up to four functions are displayed at a time. If the desired function is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] to locate it.

Confirm the operational details: 1. Touch the function that you want to confirm. 2. Confirm the details of the function and touch [Enter]. Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming the Printing Order

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Touch [Print Order].

3.

Confirm the printing order.

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Confirming the status:


Touch [ ] and [ ] to search for the document your are looking for, and to confirm the printing order.

Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

1 - 45

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Printing Status

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Touch [Print].

3.

4.

1 - 46

i i i

Confirming the status:


Up to four functions are displayed at a time. If the desired function is not displayed, touch [ ] and [ ] to locate it.

Confirm the printing status.


Confirming the status:

1. Select the printing status you want to confirm. 2. Confirm the detail information and touch [Enter].
When the document needs to be deleted:
Touch [Delete].

Touch [Enter], the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming the Transmission Status

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Touch [Com.].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 47

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Transmission Status (Continued)

3.

Confirm the transmission status.

4.

1 - 48

i i i i i

Confirming the status:


Touch [ ] and [ ] to retrieve the desired document, and confirm the transmission status.

When [Interim Rep.] is displayed:


If [Interim Rep.] is touched while a document is being scanned or transmitted, an interim transmission report is printed.

When [Delete] is displayed:


If [Delete] is touched when there is a document awaiting transmission, the transmission is cancelled.

When timer icon is displayed:


If timer transmission is set, the timer icon is displayed to the right of the reception date and time.

Time to hold the incomplete transmission data:


The length of time to hold the incomplete transmission data can be set. Refer to Setting of Length of Time to Hold Data after Incomplete Transmission (Mode 004) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-67.

Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the stand-by screen.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming the Reception Status

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Touch [Com.].

3.

Touch [RX Doc.].

4.

Confirm the reception status.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Confirming the status:


Touch [ ] and [ ] to retrieve the desired document, and confirm the reception status.

When waiting for Polling Reception:


If [Retry] is touched, dialing starts immediately.

When the document needs to be deleted:


Touch [Delete].

Touch [Enter]. The display returns to the stand-by screen.

1 - 49

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Bulletin Board Document Status

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Select [Doc.], then touch [Bultn. Board].

3.

Select the document to be confirmed.

4.

5.

1 - 50

i i i

To confirm a document:
Touch [ ] and [ ] to retrieve the desired document, and confirm the registered document. When a number key is touched, details about the document are displayed.

Confirm the details of the documents.


When the document needs to be printed:
Touch [Print].

When the document needs to be deleted:


Touch [Delete].

Touch [Enter] until the stand-by screen appears.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming the Confidential Box Documents

1.

Touch [Job List].

2.

Select [Doc.], then touch [Conf.].

3.

Select the confidential box.

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i i

The key of the box that stores a document displays in reverse. When the password is set to the confidential box, entering the password is required.

Confirm the documents stored in the confidential box.


To confirm a document:
Touch [Check] the detailed information. Touch [ ] and [ ] to retrieve the desired document, and confirm the document stored in the box.

When the document needs to be printed:


Touch [Print]. All documents inside the confidential box will be printed.

When the document needs to be deleted:


Touch [Delete]. All documents inside the confidential box will be deleted.

1 - 51

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Confidential Box Documents (Continued)

5. 1.

Touch [Enter]. The stand-by screen is displayed.

Confirming the Saved Documents

Touch [Job List].

2.

Select [Doc.], then touch [Public].

3.

Confirm the saved documents.

4.

1 - 52

i i i i

To confirm the documents:


Touch [ ] and [ ] to retrieve the desired document, and confirm the saved documents.

When the document needs to be printed:


Touch [Print].

When the document needs to be deleted:


Touch [Delete].

When a document needs to be transferred:


Touch [Forwrd].

Touch [Enter]. The stand-by screen is displayed.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 9

ROUTINE CARE

9.1

Installing Print Paper The following section describes the procedure for installing print paper in the paper cassette and changing the paper size.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to four paper cassettes can be installed using additional cassettes (optional items). The following print sizes can be set:

o = Available
11x17 11x14 Legal Letter (L) Letter (P) 51/2x81/2 (L) 51/2x81/2 (P)

= Not Available

OHP

Paper cassette Large Capacity Cabinet Multi-purpose Manual Bypass

o x o

o x o

o x o

o x o

o o o

x x o

x x o

x x o

(L) = Landscape direction

(P) = Portrait direction

OHP = Overhead Projector (transparencies)

If there is no paper left for printing, the message "Add paper" is displayed on the touch panel screen. When the paper runs out, the Paper Level Indication turns red to alert user. Use only the recommended paper.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 53

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Loading paper

1. Pull out the paper cassette.

Figure 1-28 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

2. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceed the maximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paper guide.

Maximum paper load indication

Figure 1-29 Loading the Paper Cassette

1 - 54

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3. Push the paper cassette back into the machine.

Figure 1-30 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

Changing the Paper Size 1. Pull out the paper cassette.

Figure 1-31 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 55

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2. Pinch the paper width guide with your fingers, and slide the paper guide to the desired width.

Figure 1-32 Adjusting the Paper Width Guide

3. Hold the paper length guide and slide the guide to the desired length.

Figure 1-33 Adjusting the Paper Length Guide

1 - 56

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

4. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceed the maximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paper guide.

Maximum paper load indication

Figure 1-34 Loading the Paper Cassette

5. Push in the paper cassette and replace the paper size label to reflect the size currently installed.

Figure 1-35 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 57

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Installing Paper (Large Capacity Cabinet) 1. Push the <Push> button.

1 - 58

When the main power is off, even if the tray button is pushed, the paper cassette cannot be pulled out.

Figure 1-36 Pushing the Tray Button

2. Pull out the paper cassette.

Figure 1-37 Pulling Out the Paper Cassette

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3. Insert a quantity of paper into the cassette, being careful not to exceed the maximum load. This maximum is indicated by a mark on the paper guide. Paper can be installed in both sides of the cassette.

Figure 1-38 Loading the Paper Cassette

4. Push the paper cassette back into the machine.

Figure 1-39 Pushing In the Paper Cassette

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 59

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

9.2

Installing and Replacing the Toner Bottle 1. Pull down on the toner bottle housing area cover.

Figure 1-40 Opening the Toner Bottle Cover

2. Pull the lever.

Figure 1-41 Pulling the Toner Bottle Lever

1 - 60

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3. Pull out the toner bottle tray.

Figure 1-42 Pulling Out the Toner Bottle Tray

4. Raise the holder.

Figure 1-43 Raising the Toner Holder

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 61

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

5. Slowly pull out the old toner bottle.

6. Gently tap the new toner bottle four to five times on each end (top and bottom) against a firm surface. This will loosen any settled toner.

7. Shake the new toner bottle well to loosen up the toner inside.

1 - 62

i i

This step is not necessary when installing the initial toner bottle.

Figure 1-44 Removing the Old Toner Bottle

Figure 1-45 Gently Shake the New Toner Bottle

Turn the bottle upside-down about five times.

Figure 1-46 Turn the Bottle to Loosen the Toner

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

8. Make sure the UP mark is facing upwards and install the toner bottle in the toner bottle tray. Lower the holder.

Figure 1-47 Inserting the New Toner Bottle

9. Peel off the seal slowly. Caution: If the seal is not peeled off slowly, the toner may spill out and cause stains.

Figure 1-48 Inserting the New Toner Bottle

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 63

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

10. Replace the toner bottle tray, until a click sound is heard.

Figure 1-49 Lowering the Toner Bottle Holder

11. Closer the toner cover.

Figure 1-50 Closing the Toner Cover

1 - 64

i i

The toner is automatically supplied to the unit after the toner bottle cover is closed. Do not turn off the power, or open this cover while the tone is being supplied.

It may be impossible to remove the toner bottle if the cover is opened while the bottle is being rotated. In this case, close the cover, and try again a short time later. Toner Supply:
If the print is still faint immediately after toner replacement, execute the toner supply procedure. For details on this procedure, refer to Section 5 Toner Replenishment in Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 8-31.

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

9.3

Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp This procedure illustrates how to install and replace the TX Marker.
Before Starting Operations:
A spare TX Marker Stamp is required. The spare TX Marker Stamp is a consumable part. Replacement markers must be purchased from the dealer who sold this product.

Installing and Replacing the Spare TX Marker Stamp 1. Pull the lever and lift up on the Document Feeder Cover.

Figure 1-51 Lifting the Document Feeder Cover

2. Open the Document Guide Plate.

Figure 1-52 Opening the Document Guide Plate

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 65

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3. Pull out the used Marker.

4. Insert the new Marker in place.

Fit the little round peaks fixed to the Marker to the slit in the main product.

5. Close the Document Guide Plate.

1 - 66

i i

This step is not necessary on an initial Marker installation.

Figure 1-53 Removing the Used Marker

Figure 1-54 Installing a New Marker

Figure 1-55 Closing the Document Guide Plate

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

6. Lower the Document Feeder Cover to the operating position.

Figure 1-56 Lowering the Document Feeder Cover

9.4

Installing and Adding Staples This section describes how to install and add staples in the optional Built-in Finisher Unit. When the Finisher Unit is first installed, staples will need to be added to the stapler. When the warning message "There are no staples" is displayed, the staple supply is exhausted and will need replacement. Installing and Adding the Staple Cartridge 1. Open the front cover.

Figure 1-57 Opening the Front Unit Cover

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 67

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2. Open the Finisher cover.

Figure 1-58 Opening the Finisher Cover

3. Pull out the staple holder.

Stapler

Cog

1 - 68

When the stapler becomes empty, the stapler moves to the front position automatically. If the stapler is at back inside, rotate the green cog and move the stapler to the front position.

Figure 1-59 Removing the Staple Holder

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

4. Push two [PUSH] buttons on the sides of the staple holder.

Figure 1-60 Pushing Staple Holder Buttons

5. Pull out the empty staple cartridge from the staple holder.

Staple Cartridge

Figure 1-61 Removing the Empty Cartridge

6. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple holder, and carefully remove the stopper sticker.

Figure 1-62 Inserting the New Staple Cartridge

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 69

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

7. Insert the refilled staple holder into the stapling unit.

Figure 1-63 Installing the Refilled Staple Holder

8. Close the Finisher cover.

Figure 1-64 Closing the Finisher Cover

9. Close the front cover.

Figure 1-65 Closing the Front Cover

1 - 70

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Clearing a Staple Jam 1. If a staple should jam, remove the staple holder. Refer to Section 9.4 Installing and Adding Staples on page 1-67. 2. Push the guide up on the staple holder to remove the sheet of staples. The jammed staple can be removed.

Figure 1-66 Removing a Staple Jam

3. Replace the staple holder.

Installing and Adding the Staple Cartridge (Saddle/Folding Kit) 1. While holding up the paper output tray, remove the staple cartridge.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

After a staple jam has been cleared, stapling may not occur for a maximum of 10 times, until the sheet of staples is brought into position.

1 - 71

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2. Press in the area marked "PUSH" to unlock the staple holder.

3. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge holder.

4. Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.

1 - 72

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

5. Carefully remove the stopper.

6. Insert the refilled staple cartridge holder until it locks into place.

7. Lower the paper output tray. 8. Open then shut the misfeedclearing door.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Caution!:
Be careful when installing the staple cartridge holder. Be sure that the staple cartridge holder is inserted facing the correct direction.

1 - 73

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

9.5

Cleaning This section describes how to clean various areas of the machine.
Before Starting Operations:
Use a soft cloth slightly dampened with water, or a gentle cleanser. Be certain to thoroughly wring out the cloth before using it, as dripping any liquid inside the unit can cause product failure. The panel-cleaning screen should be selected on the touch panel before cleaning it begins.

Cleaning the External Surfaces 1. Using a damp cloth, wipe each surface area of the unit.

1 - 74

Both the glass surface of the document scanning area and the document feed rollers should be cleaned often in order to maintain high image quality. Any dirty or paper dust on these surfaces can adversely affect the copy quality. Maintaining a regular cleaning schedule will keep these areas free of contaminants.

Figure 1-67 Cleaning the External Surfaces

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Cleaning the Touch Panel 1. The panel screen should be displayed.


Press <Utility>. Select [User Management], and touch [Panel Cleaning].

Figure 1-68 Displaying the Panel Cleaning Screen

Figure 1-69 Panel Cleaning Mode

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 75

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2. Clean the Touch Panel.

Figure 1-70 Cleaning the Touch Panel

3. Press <Panel Reset> to return to the Utility screen.

Figure 1-71 Reset the Touch Panel Screen

1 - 76

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Cleaning the Document Scanning Area 1. Open the document cover.

Figure 1-72 Opening the Document Cover

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 77

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2. Clean the document scanning area, glass top, and document pad.

Clean here

Figure 1-73 Cleaning Areas

1 - 78

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3. Clean the top white parts.

Top White Parts

Figure 1-74 Clean White Parts

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 79

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

4. Close the document cover.

Figure 1-75 Closing the Document Cover

1 - 80

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers 1. Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

Figure 1-76 Lifting the Document Hopper

2. Clean the ten feed rollers in the hopper area. Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers.

Refer to Figure 1-77

Clean rollers Clean rollers

Figure 1-77 Cleaning the Document Feed Rollers

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 81

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3. Lift the document guide plate up as well, and clean the four lower rollers.

Clean rollers

Figure 1-78 Cleaning the Lower Rollers

4. Close the document guide plate and lower the document feeder cover to their original position.

Figure 1-79 Closing the Hopper and Hopper Cover

1 - 82

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Throwing Away the Hole Punching Dust 1. Open the front cover.

Figure 1-80 Opening the Front Cover

2. Open the Finisher cover.

Figure 1-81 Opening the Finisher Cover

3. Pull out the dust box (FN3.1).

Dust Box

Figure 1-82 Pulling Out the Dust Box

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 83

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

4. Throw away the hole punching dust.

Figure 1-83 Discarding the Hole Punch Dust

5. Insert the dust box (FN3.1).

Figure 1-84 Putting the Dust Box Back into Place

1 - 84

Getting Started

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

6. Close the Finisher cover.

Figure 1-85 Closing the Finisher Cover

7. Close the front cover.

Figure 1-86 Closing the Front Cover

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

1 - 85

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

1 - 86

Getting Started

Chapter 2

Copy Operations

SECTION 1

BASIC COPY OPERATIONS


This chapter describes using the NEC IT3520/ IT2520 basic copy functions, as well as more advanced functions. Features such as enlargement or reduction, image quality selection, selecting the copy paper size, sorting, stapling, and hole-punching will be covered in detail.

There are two ways to scan documents when making copies: Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) - up to 80 pages will automatically be scanned, page-by-page. Book Scanner - When a book, magazine, catalog, brochure, or any other bound material is to be copied, the Book Scanner should be used.
Before Starting Operations:
Observe which screen is being displayed to determine how to begin the Copy mode. Auto-mode screen:

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Copying is available whenever this screen is displayed.

If four digits or more are input (three digits for the IT2520), or a number beginning with 0, *, # (facsimile number), the Auto-mode screen automatically switches to the facsimile transmission mode.
Copy screen:

The machine is ready to copy when the Copy screen is showing.

2-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

FAX screen:

When the FAX screen is displayed, press the <Copy> key to make copies.
Memory Recall Function:

The machine first scans the document and stores the data in memory before starting to copy. This image data is retained in memory and can be used to make repeated copies. This is called "Memory Recall".
For further details on this function, refer to Section 1.3 Memory Recall in Chapter 2 on page 2-5.

1.1

Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) allows up to 80 pages at a time to be placed into the feeder. Each page is scanned, one-by-one, and exits the feeder in the original order, as it was inserted.

1. 2.

Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

3.

Use the 10-key pad to enter the number of copies.

4.

2-2

i i

Change the number of copies by pressing <C> (Clear key). Up to 999 copies (99 copies for the IT2520) can be made.

Press <Start>.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

5.

Copying with the Automatic Document Feeder (Continued)

Confirm Accepted time, Job No., and touch [Enter].

6.

Copying will now begin.

1.2

Copying with the Book Scanner The Book Scanner allows copies to be made of books, magazines, reports, or any other bound material.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

Copying begins even if [Enter] is not touched. To Stop Copying: Press <Stop> to cease copying. The screen changes to the stop screen and the copy process will stop. Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 on page 1-36. If Memory is Full: Retry copying later if the facsimile function is being used. If paper is empty, refill the cassettes as needed. Refer to Section 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 on page 1-53.

2-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1. 2. 3.

Copying with the Book Scanner

Open the Document Cover and place the document on the glass surface.
For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Close the Document Cover. Press <Copy>.

4.

Use the 10-key pad to enter the number of copies.

5. 6.

2-4

i i

Change the number of copies by pressing <C> (Clear key). Up to 999 copies (99 copies for the IT2520) can be made.

Press <Start>. Confirm the Accepted time, Job No., and touch [Enter].

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

7.

Copying with the Book Scanner (Continued)

Copying will now begin.

1.3

Memory Recall The Memory Recall function allows for repeat copying of a document.

1.

Memory Recall (Repeat Copying of the Same Document)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i i

Copying begins even if [Enter] is not touched. To Stop Copying: Press <Stop> to cease copying. The screen changes to the stop screen and the copy process will stop. Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 on page 1-36. If Memory is Full: Retry copying later if the facsimile function is being used. If paper is empty, refill the cassettes as needed. Refer to 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 on page 1-53.

Touch [Job List], when the Memory Recall icon is displayed.


Memory Recall icon is displayed only when the function is available.

Memory Recall is not available in the following cases:


When the power is turned off When a new document is scanned. (When <Start> is pressed). The new document will be able to perform Memory Recall.

2-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.

Memory Recall (Repeat Copying of the Same Document)

Touch [Memory Recall Waiting].

3.

2-6

i i i

To clear: Select [Back] and touch [Clear]. It is recommended that <Panel Reset> be pressed after copying to delete confidential document data.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.


The number of copies and the Sorting mode can be changed.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.4

Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying When two or more sizes of paper are installed, the print paper size selection can be set automatically in accordance with the scanned document. Manual paper size selection is available, as well.
Before Starting Operations:
The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the copied image in accordance with the print paper size if [Auto Size] is selected as the zoom ratio. For details on enlargement and reduction, refer to Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying in Chapter 2 on page 2-14. Automatic Paper Selection Function: This function automatically selects the paper in accordance with the scanned documents size, direction, and zoom ratio setting. The Automatic Paper Selection function has a preset (default) factory setting. It can be set to select a determined copy paper cassette as priority. For details, refer to Section 1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying. If an irregularly sized document is set (any size other than letter or legal size), the document size may not be detected correctly, and may be copied on the incorrect size paper or not copied at all. In this case, the operator must manually select the copy paper cassette. When the ADF is used for copying, the copy size will be determined by the first scanned page of the document and the same sized paper will be used for the remaining printed pages. (This does not apply to a case when the Mixed Original Detection setting has been enabled.) When letter sized paper is selected for copying, even if the document and paper direction differ, the direction of the paper can automatically be rotated 90o for copying. (This function cannot be used when the Book Scanner is used for copying after selecting the paper.)

1. 2.

Selecting the Copy Paper Cassette

Load the document in the ADF or Book Scanner.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3.

Selecting the Copy Paper Cassette (Continued)

Select [Basics] and touch [Paper].

4.

Select the Paper Cassette.

5. 1.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray

2-8

i i i

To Select the paper: The copy paper size, direction, and cassette number are displayed on the keys that depict the paper cassette. Select the paper cassette in accordance with the original documents direction. When the [Auto Paper] key is touched: Paper will automatically be selected in accordance with the original documents size and zoom ratio.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Load the document in the ADF or Book Scanner.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Press <Copy>.

3.

Select [Basics] and touch [Paper].

4.

Select the Multi-purpose Bypass Tray and touch [Mode Change].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

5.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Select the paper size and type.

Paper Sizes and Types: Regular Size (Letter or Legal) 1. Touch the cassette paper size.

Irregular Sized Paper 1. Touch [Custom Size]. 2. Touch the and to enter the horizontal length (X) and to enter the vertical length (Y). 3. Touch [Enter].

To Select: Touch [X] and [Y] to move the cursor. Sizes available: X = 5 1/2 inches to 17 inches (140 to 432 mm) Y = 3 9/16 inches to 11 11/16 inches (90 to 297 mm)

2 - 10

i i

Print paper selection should be made in accordance with the original documents size and direction.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)


Memorizing the Paper Size 1. Touch [Custom Size]. 2. Touch [Memorize Paper Size]. 3. Touch the and to enter the horizontal length [X] and to enter the vertical length [Y]. 4. Select [1] or [2] and then touch [Enter]. Using the Memorized Paper Size for Copying 1. Touch [Custom Size]. 2. Select [1] or [2] and then touch [Enter].

Copying on OHP paper or Card 1. Select the paper type, and touch [Enter].

The Card setting should be selected when printing postcards or labels.

6.

Touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

7.

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)

Load a sheet of paper onto the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. 1. Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.
If a large sheet of print paper is being used, open the extension table to prevent it from falling out.

2. Place a sheet of paper on the tray. 3. Adjust the guides to the paper width. 4. Insert the paper until the paper stops.
Extension Table

2 - 12

Observe the following:


Adjust the guides exactly to the paper width. Set a new paper each time you copy. Set the document pages face down. Set the original document in accordance with the size and direction of the selected paper. Do not use wrinkled, folded, or damp paper. Avoid using paper that has been printed on one side. This can lead to paper jamming. When a postcard or thick paper stock is used, straighten out the shape before inserting onto the tray. When thick paper, OHP paper, postcards, or labels are used for copying, do not select any of the 2-Sided Copying, Booklet, Stapling, or Holepunching functions. Up to 150 sheets can be set. When postcards, labels, OHP papers, or thick papers are used, dont set over 50. When envelopes are used dont set over 10. When postcards or envelopes are used, set the shorter side of the paper toward the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. When envelopes are used, load with the flap side up, as shown in the drawing.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)


When envelopes are used, push out any air inside the envelope and hold the edge tightly. If the edge is not held tightly, it can lead to wrinkling or paper jamming.

8.

Copying will now begin.

Special Paper Mode

When the icons above are displayed on the paper size selection key, the special paper mode is set for that cassette. The icons displayed and description are shown next. their

Recycled paper
If this mode has been set, the paper cassette containing recycled print paper is not selected when the automatic paper selection function is enabled. For example, if both new and recycled paper are loaded into separate cassettes and the new paper is mainly used, the new paper is selected as the priority paper when copying by setting the cassette containing recycled paper into this Recycled paper mode.

2-Sided Copy is Impossible


This icon indicates that double sided copying is impossible for the print paper in this cassette. The product will not select that particular cassette in the Auto Paper mode.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To copy two or more sheets: Consecutive copying is possible by setting the appropriate amount of paper on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

2 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Copying with the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray (Continued)


Special paper
When this mode is set, the paper is not selected automatically. For example, this will prevent accidently printing on special colored paper, which had been intended only for use as cover sheets or separators in the printed copy.

1.5

Paper Size Reset The paper size selection is reset to the default setting by touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the paper size selection will also be reset after a period of time (set by the user).

1.6

Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying

Before Starting Operations:


The zoom ratio can be selected by the following methods: Full-Size The document is copied in the same size as the original, regardless of the copy paper size.

2 - 14

When Special Paper Mode is set: Installing the same sized paper in two cassettes, or more, allows the unit to automatically switch between paper cassettes to continue the print job, if paper runs out in a cassette. However, if this mode is set, the cassette will not be selected.

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 can reduce or enlarge the size of copies. The zoom ratio can be set automatically in accordance with the original documents size and the sizes of copy paper installed, or it can be set manually.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

The zoom ratio can be selected by the following methods: (Continued) Auto-Size The optimal zoom ratio is automatically selected in accordance with the size of the original and the selected copy paper size. Zoom ratio for copying regular-sized documents onto regular-sized copy paper have already been set in touch panel keys. The desired zoom ratio can be set in increments of 0.1%. The document can be copied at a slightly smaller size than the original by simply touching the [Minimal] key. This is useful when copying documents with writing at the very edge of the paper. The zoom ratio can also be changed. The desired zoom ratio can be set using the 10-key Pad. The X and Y zoom ratio can be set for the documents length and width. Up to two, most frequently used zoom ratios can be registered.

Fixed Zoom (Letter, Legal, etc.)

Zoom Up/Zoom Down Slightly Smaller Image

Custom Zoom X/Y Zoom Zoom Memory Input

1.7

Selecting the Zoom Ratio The zoom ratio can be selected by the operator. Automatic zoom adjustment is available, as well as manually setting the zoom for precise reduction or enlargement.

1.

Selecting the Zoom Ratio

Load the document in the ADF or the Book Scanner.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.

Selecting the Zoom Ratio (Continued)

Press <Copy>.

3.

Select [Basics] and touch [Zoom].

4.

The various zoom settings are then displayed. Select the zoom ratio.

2 - 16

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.8

Zoom Selections Available Setting to Full-Size: 1. Touch [Full-Size]. Setting the Fixed Zoom Ratio: 1. Select either an enlargement or a reduction key for the desired zoom ratio. 2. Make the selection in accordance with the originals size and the installed copy paper sizes.

Setting the Automatic Zoom Ratio: 1. Touch [Auto Size].

Using the Zoom Up/Zoom Down Key: 1. Use the or arrow key to select the zoom ratio.
To Select: arrow is Every time the touched, the zoom ratio increases by 0.001 (0.1%). Every time the arrow is touched, the zoom ratio decreases by 0.001 (0.1%). The zoom ratio can be changed rapidly by repeatedly touching the arrow key.

When [Auto Size] is touched, the screen changes to the paper cassette selecting screen.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

L M

Irregular sized documents (any size other than Letter or Legal) may be copied with an incorrect zoom ratio. In such cases, a manual zoom setting should be made.

M L

i i

2 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Slightly Smaller Image Copies: 1. Touch [Minimal].

Setting the X/Y Zoom: 1. Touch [Custom Zoom]. 2. Touch [X/Y Zoom].

Custom Zoom Ratio: 1. Touch [Custom Zoom]. 2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio and touch [Enter].

To Select:
Figures ranging from 0.250 (25%) to 4.000 (400%) can be selected as the zoom ratio. For example, for 0.645 (64.5%), press <0>, <6>, <4>, and <5> in that order using the 10-key Pad. Press <C> (Clear key) to clear the figures.

2 - 18

i i i

The zoom ratio for documents needing only slight reduction can be changed. For details, refer to Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying on page 2-14. The factory default setting is 93%.

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio for paper width (X) and length (Y) and touch [Enter].

To Select:
Enter figures after touching [X] or [Y]. Figures ranging from 0.250 (25%) to 4.000 (400%) can be selected as the zoom ratio.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.9

Registering the Zoom Ratio The zoom ratio may be registered into a key, so that the most frequently used settings are conveniently available to the operator at the touch of a single key.

1. 2.

Registering the Zoom Ratio

Touch [Custom Zoom]. Touch [Memorize Zoom].

3.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the zoom ratio before selecting [1], [2], or [Minimal]. Then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To Select:
When touching [1], [2], or [Minimal] after entering the zoom ratio, the zoom ratio is registered on the selected key. Figures ranging from 0.250 (25%) to 4.000 (400%) can be selected as the zoom ratio for [1] or [2], and figures ranging from 0.900 (90%) to 0.999 (99.9%) for [Minimal]. For example, for 0.645 (64.5%), press <0>, <6>, <4>, and <5> using the 10-key Pad. Press <C> (Clear) to delete the characters.

2 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.10

Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying A pre-registered zoom ratio can be executed at the touch of a key. This is useful when regular zoom amounts are used in copying jobs.
Using the Registered Zoom Ratio for Copying

1. 2. 3.

Touch [Custom Zoom]. Select [1], [2], and touch [Enter].

1.11

Zoom Ratio Reset The zoom ratio selection is reset to the default setting by touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the zoom ratio selection will also be reset after a period of time set by the user.

1.12

Adjusting the Density for Copying The density can be adjusted to suit the contrast of the text and the background of the document being copied. For example, if the document is printed on dark colored paper, the density can be adjusted to print the text clearly.
Before Starting Operations:
Density can be adjusted by the following methods: Automatic density - Determines the density of the document and automatically selects the optimal density for copying. Manual density Allows the user to manually select the density according to their needs.

2 - 20

To Select: The zoom ratio that has been registered on [1] or [2] is set.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2.

Adjusting the Density

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

3.

Touch [Density].

4.

Touch [Auto], [Lighter], or [Darker] to select the density.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Using the Automatic Density Function:


Touch [Auto] to display it in reverse.

Selecting with the Manual Density Function:


Every time [Lighter] is touched, the printing is lightened, whereas touching [Darker] darkens the printing.

When [Photo] is selected for the image quality, the automatic density function cannot be used. Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the density.

2 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

5.
1.13

Adjusting the Density (Continued)

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Making the Choice for Density Selection The choice for the density selection is based on the original document. Here is an example. Density Selection
Lighter

Document Type
Darker document (such as newspaper or blueprint with dense characters)

Normal

Normal document

Darker

Text is light or printed in color.

1.14

Density Setting Reset The density setting selection is reset to the default setting by touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the density setting selection will also be reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details, refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

2 - 22

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.15

Copying Figures and Photos Documents to be copied may include text, drawings, and/or photographs. The NEC IT3520/IT2520 allows you to select an appropriate Image Quality for exceptional copying.

Select the image quality in accordance with the original document type: [Text] - Select this when copying documents consisting of mainly text. [Photo] - Select this when copying documents containing photos, or lighter and darker parts. [Text/Photo] - Select this when copying documents with a mixture of text and photos.

1. 2.

Setting the Image Quality

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3.

Setting the Image Quality (Continued)

Touch [Density].

4.

Select the desired image quality from [Text], [Photo], and [Text/ Photo].

5.
1.16

Image Quality Setting Reset The image quality setting selection is reset to the default setting by touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the image quality setting selection will also be reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details, refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

2 - 24

When [Photo] is selected, the automatic density function cannot be used.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 2

ADVANCED COPY OPERATIONS


The more advanced copy functions will now be described. Features such as stapling, hole-punching, sorting, inserting cover sheets and OHP sheets, will be covered in detail.

2.1

Using the Sort Mode While Copying This function is useful when making two or more sets of copies. Each set can be printed out in the order of the original document (Sorting), or the same page can be printed out the required number of times (Grouping). When many pages of documents need to be copied for multiple sets, such as documents for meetings, they can easily be sorted using this function.
Before Starting Operations:
To make copies using the sort mode, the same size and same type of copy paper should be inserted in separate paper cassettes in different directions, or the optional Built-in Finisher will be required. If a document positioned on the original glass is copied using the "Sort" setting, copying is automatically performed using the "Separate Scan" function. This function cannot be used when Stapling, Hole Punch setting, Cover Mode, Image Repeat, or Mixed Original Detection is selected. A paper drawer cannot be selected.

Sorting Options

Sort

The documents are copied and sorted in the same page order as the original.

Group

Each page of the document is copied separately the specified number of times.

Non-Sort

The specified number of pages are copied in the same order as the original, without being sorted.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1. 2. 3.

Sorting Procedure

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Touch [Finishing].

4.

Select the desired sorting option.

5.

6.

2 - 26

When 1-Sided to 1-Sided copying is done using the Book Scanner, the sorting functions (Group, Sort) cannot be used.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the required number of copies.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Sorting / Grouping Details When [Sort] or [Group] is selected, copying depends on the optional parts installed on the NEC IT3520/IT2520. Refer to Table 2-1 Sorting / Grouping with Options.
Table 2-1 Selecting Sort or Group Sorting / Grouping with Options When the same sized paper is loaded in separate cassettes in different directions

When the Job Separator or Finisher Tray is installed

Sort

Each set of copies is sorted by shifting the output.

Each set of copies is sorted in a different direction.

Group

Copies are sorted by shifting in accordance with each page of the document.

Copies are sorted in a different direction in accordance with each page of the document.

Sorting Selection Setting Reset The sorting selection (Sort, Non-Sort, or Group) is reset to the default setting by touching <Panel Reset>. If the machine sits idle, the sorting selection will also be reset after a period of time set by the user. For more details refer to Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.2

Stapled Binding The sorted copies can be stapled.


Before Starting Operations:
The optional Built-in Finisher is required to use this function. The stapling position can be changed in accordance with the document and the direction of the copy paper. If [OFF] is selected, the stapling position will automatically be specified. Up to 50 sheets can be stapled together when using the Built-in Finisher. Up to 15 sheets can be stapled together when using the Saddle/Folding Kit. Do not use this function with thick paper, envelope, or OHP film. The staple cartridge must be replaced when the "Replace the Staple Cartridge" message is displayed. For more details, refer to Section 9.4 Installing and Adding Staples in Chapter 1 on page 1-67. If "Corner Stapling" was selected, the stapling position cannot be specified. However, if the "Corner Stapling" is used together with the "Hole Punch" setting, the stapling position can be specified. If a document positioned on the original glass is copied using a stapling setting, copying is automatically performed using the "Separate Scan" function. A stapling setting cannot be selected if another job has been interrupted.

1. 2. 3.

Stapling

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

2 - 28

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.

Staple Settings

To staple a document: 1. Corner Staple - Touch [Corner Staple].

2. 2-Point Staple - Touch [2-Point Staple], then touch [Select Position].

2.

Select a stapling position, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To select:
Touch the key displaying the desired position.

2 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Original Documents Direction Care must be taken when placing the original document into the ADF, or Book Scanner, so that the correct stapling position occurs. When the Corner Staple Setting is Selected:
Document Orientation Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder Scanning from the Original Glass Staple Position

Document size: Letter C

Document size: Letter C

Paper size: Letter C

Document size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Paper size: 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter or Legal L

Document size: Letter or Legal L

Paper size: Letter or Legal L

Document size: 11 x 17 L

Document size: 11 x 17 L

Paper size: 11 x 17 L

2 - 30

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

When 2-Point Staple Setting is Selected:


Document Orientation Screen Icon Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder Scanning from the Original Glass Staple Position

Document size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Paper size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter C or Legal C

Document size: Letter C or Legal C

Paper size: Letter L or Legal L

Document size: Letter L or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter L or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Paper size: Letter C or 5-1/2 x 8-1/2 C

Document size: Letter L or Legal L

Document size: Letter L or Legal L

Paper size: Letter L or Legal L

Document size: 11 x 17 L

Document size: 11 x 17 L

Paper size: 11 x 17 L

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Points to Note When Stapling It is recommended to sort up to the following number of sets of copies, otherwise the copies may become unsorted or fall from the Finisher bin slots. Refer to Table 2-2 Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set.
Table 2-2 # Sheets to be Stapled Stapled Number of Pages Per Copied Set Number of Sets Accumulated

2 3 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 20 21 to 30 31 to 40 41 to 50

100 sets 80 sets 60 sets 40 sets 33 sets 25 sets 20 sets

2.3

Hole Punching The printed copies can be 2-hole or 3-hole punched for convenience and filing.
Before Starting Operations:
The optional Built-in Finisher and Punch Kit are required to use this function. The hole punching position can be changed in accordance with the original document and the direction of the copy paper. Do not use this function with thick paper, envelopes, or OHP film. If copying is started without the hole punch position specified, or if [OFF] was selected, the hole punch position is automatically specified according to the document orientation, as shown:

2 - 32

When Saddle/Folding Kit is used, it can staple from 2 to 15 sheets.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2. 3.

Hole Punching

Place the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

4.

Touch [2-Hole Punch] or [3-Hole Punch].

5.

Touch [Select Position].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 33

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

6.

Hole Punching (Continued)

Select the position for punching the holes and touch [Enter].

7.

Original Documents Direction Care must be taken when placing the original document into the ADF, or Book Scanner, so that the correct hole punching position occurs. Refer to Table 2-3 Hole Punching Position.
Table 2-3 Hole Punching Position Document Orientation Screen Icon Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder Scanning from the Original Glass

2 - 34

To Select:
Touch the display key for the hole position to be selected.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Table 2-3

Hole Punching Position (Continued) Document Orientation

Screen Icon

Feeding from the Duplexing Document Feeder

Scanning from the Original Glass

2.4

Setting a Crease The pages can be folded in half for creating a Booklet.
Before Starting Operations:
In order to crease the sheet of paper, the optional Built-in Finisher and Saddle/Folding Kit is required. Booklet Creation must be selected before choosing [Crease]. Refer to Setting for Booklet Creation on page 2-52. Additionally, you can add two staples in the middle of the paper (center stapling). Creased and 2-Point Stapling can be applied to Letter to 11x17L sized paper. 2 to 15 sheets of paper can be stapled. Only plain and recycled paper can be creased or 2-Point Stapled. When crease or center stapling is selected, depending on the document set direction, it will be copied as shown below.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 35

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Depending on the document set direction, such as setting the vertical side of the lengthwise document against the back, the copy page order may be changed.

1. 2. 3.

Setting a Crease

Place the document in the Unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy> Select [Basics] and touch [Finishing].

4.

Touch [Crease].

5.

2 - 36

When using Center Staple, (folding), select the [2-Point Staple] key.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.5

Mixed Size Original Document Detection Copy paper is selected automatically in accordance with the length of each original document sheet fed in the ADF.
Before Starting Operations:
Original documents must be set in the ADF to use this function. Up to 80 sheets in a document can be set at once. The copy speed is slightly slower since the size of each sheet is detected prior to copying. If documents of different lengths are inserted without enabling this function, the copy paper is selected on the basis of the first page of the document, and the same sized paper as the first page will be used for the remainder (when used together with the automatic paper selection function). Stapling may not be possible when the automatic paper selection function is used together with this function.

Handling Documents
Make sure the document sheets are fully inserted into the ADF. Adjust the document guides to the largest documents width.

Table 2-4 Examples of Copying Mixed Documents

Original document

Copy

With automatic paper selection

Original document

Copy

When the automatic size is used to select Letter sized paper.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 37

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Table 2-5 Mixed Original Detection Mode Allowable Size Combinations Maximum Original Width Mixed Original Size
11 x 17L 11 x 17L

11"
8-1/2 x 11C 8-1/2 x 14L

8-1/2"
8-1/2 x 11L 8-1/2 x 5-1/2C

5-1/2"
8-1/2 x 5-1/2L

O O O O X X

O O O O X X

O O O X

O O O X

O O O X

11"
8-1/2 x 11C 8-1/2 x 14L

8-1/2"
8-1/2 x 11L 8-1/2 x 5-1/2C

5-1/2"
8-1/2 x 5-1/2L

O = Copying possible X = Combination not allowed - = Cannot be set

1.

Selecting Mixed Original Detection

Place the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

2.

2 - 38

Stack the document pages face up, making sure that all pages are aligned at the top edge and on the left side. For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3.

Selecting Mixed Original Detection (Continued)

Select [Basics] and touch [Mixed Orig Detection].

4.

Mixed Original Detection Setting Reset The mixed document selection is reset by pressing <Panel Reset> or will be reset after the machine sits idle for a time set by the user. For more details, refer to 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 on page 3-4.

2.6

Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig. Copy Screen) Various ways of copying can be selected by combining the document and copy formats. This function enables 2-Sided copying, Separation copying for documents on two facing pages, and copying multiple documents on one page; all features are displayed on one convenient screen.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

[Mixed Orig Detection] is displayed in reverse when it is selected. [Mixed Orig Detection] can be selected only when [1 Sided] is selected in both the document and copy menus on the [Orig. Copy] screen, and the 2-Sided Print Unit is used.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

2 - 39

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Orig. Copy Screen: Use the [Orig. Copy] function to select the document and copy formats.

1-Sided documents 2-Sided documents Bound documents (books, magazines) Separation copying Spread sheet copying Book erasing 1-Sided copying 2-Sided copying 2-Sided, 2in1 copying 1-Sided, 4in1 copying 2-Sided, 4in1 copying Booklet Creation 1-Sided, 2in1 copying 4in1 Booklet

Document Format: (the document to be scanned) 1-Sided documents - To be used when a 1-Sided document is copied. 2-Sided documents - To be used when a 2-Sided document is copied. Bound documents To be used when copying bound pages, such as in a book or magazine, etc. The document should be set on the Book Scanner when copying bound material. Select [Standard Book] or [Right Bound] in accordance with the side of the bound material.

Copy Format: 1-Sided copying Copying onto a single side of paper.

2 - 40

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2-Sided copying -

Copying onto both sides of the paper. The optional 2-Sided Print Unit is required.

1-Sided, 2in1 copying -

Two sheets of a document are copied onto a single side of copy paper.

2-Sided, 2in1 copying -

A total of four pages of a document are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of copy paper. The optional Duplex Unit is required.

1-Sided, 4in1 copying -

A total of four pages of a document are copied onto a single side of paper. This function may not be available, depending on the model.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 41

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2-Sided, 4in1 copying -

A total of eight pages of a document are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of copy paper. The optional Duplex Unit is required. This function may not be available, depending on the model.

Booklet Creation -

Copying onto both sides of copy paper in book page order. Folding and binding the paper down the center can make a booklet, magazine, reports, etc. The optional Duplex Unit is required.

2 - 42

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Book/Separation copy -

This function can be used to copy a bound document. The bound document is copied onto individual pages.

Book/Spreadsheet copy - This format can be used to copy bound reports. Two facing pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper without being divided into two sheets.

Book Erase -

This format can be used to copy two facing pages in a book. The edge of the document can be erased (frame erasing) or the margin of the book can be erased (center erasing) when copying. Both the frame and center erase functions can be selected simultaneously.
Center Erase

Frame Erase

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 43

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting for Copying a Bound Document in Page Order: In book page order: This setting can be used to carry out 2-Sided copying of a bound document. Copying is divided into individual pages, and 2-Sided copying is carried out in the book page order. The optional Duplex Unit is required.

Setting for Copying a Bound Document in Page Order: Copying facing pages in a book onto both sides of a sheet of paper: This setting can be used to carry out 2-Sided copying of a bound document. Copying is divided into individual pages, and two facing pages are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. The optional Duplex Unit is required.

Setting for Loading a Document: Selects the document direction (long side placed vertically or horizontally) and document installation direction (placed vertically or horizontally) when carrying out 2-Sided copying, 2in1 copying, 4in1 copying, or copying a 2-Sided document. Failure to set the document direction and document installation direction may result in the page order and copying direction to be incorrect.

Setting for the Margin of a Document: When a 1-Sided document with a margin is copied onto both sides of a sheet of paper, or 2-Sided documents with margins are copied onto a single side of paper, the position of the margin can be adjusted.

2 - 44

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2.

Accessing the Orig.

Copy Screen

Press <Copy>. Touch [Orig. Copy].

Display changes to the [Orig. screen.

Copy]

3.

Set the document and copy formats.


Refer to Section 2.7 Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents and Section 2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats for setting the required document and copy formats.

4.

Place the document and make the copy.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 45

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.7

Selecting Formats for Various Original Documents The various document formats available on the NEC IT3520/IT2520 are listed next. Choose the document format in accordance with the original document placed in the ADF or Book Scanner.

1.

Setting for 1-Sided Original Documents

Touch [1 Sided] on the [Orig. Copy] screen.

1.

Setting for 2-Sided Original Documents

1.

Setting for Bound Documents (Book/Separation Copy, Book/Spreadsheet Copy, Book Erase)

2 - 46

i i i

The selected key is displayed in reverse to show it is turned on. The factory default setting is [1 Sided -> 1 Sided].

Touch [2 Sided] on the [Orig. Copy] screen.


The selected key is displayed in reverse to show it is turned on. Each sheet of the document is automatically turned over and scanned.

Adjust the center of the bound document to the mark on the Book Scanner.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.

Setting for Bound Documents (Book/Separation Copy, Book/Spreadsheet Copy, Book Erase) (Continued)

Touch [Book] on the [Orig. Copy] screen.

3.

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

Copying a bound document onto both sides of paper:


You can select whether to copy in the same order as the pages in a book, or to copy two facing pages onto both sides of a sheet of paper.

2in1 copying, 4in1 copying, and Booklet Creation cannot be carried out when [Book] is selected. Refer to Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order on page 2-53.

Touch [Standard Book] or [Right Bound].


To Select:
When [Standard Book] is touched, copying is carried out from the left page to the right page. When [Right Bound] is touched, copying is carried out from the right page to the left page.

The selected key is displayed in reverse.

Selecting the copy format required.

2 - 47

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.8

Selecting the Various Copy Formats After making the original document format selection, the type of copy format required must be selected. The various copy formats are listed next. Choose the copy format in accordance with the original document format selection and the required copy output needed.

1.

Copying Two Facing Pages Individually (Book/Separation Copy)

Select [Separation] and touch [Enter].

1.

Copying Two Facing Pages onto a Single Sheet of Paper (Book/Spreadsheet Copy)

Select [Spread-sheet] and touch [Enter].

1. 2.

Erasing the Edge and Margin of the Document when Copying (Book Erase)

Touch [Book Erase]. Select the position that the Book Erase function will apply to.

2 - 48

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

4.

Touch [Enter].

To Select:
Touch the arrow under the following displays to set the position to be erased.

Figures ranging from 1/4 to 3/4 inch (5 to 20 mm) can be set as the frame erasing. The center erasing width is fixed to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Every time the [ ] arrow is touched, the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm). Every time the [ ] arrow is touched, the set value is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

M L
L

3.

Erasing the Edge and Margin of the Document when Copying (Book Erase)

Use the or arrow keys to set the area to be erased when copying.

i i

To erase the edge of the document To erase the margin

To erase both the edge and the margin of the document

2 - 49

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.

Setting for 1-Sided Copying

Touch [1 Sided] on the right side of the [Orig. Copy] screen.

1.

Setting for 2-Sided Copying

Touch [2 Sided] on the right side of the [Orig. Copy] screen.

1.

Setting for 1-Sided, 2in1 Copying

2 - 50

i i

Copying bound documents onto both sides of paper:


You can select whether to copy a book in the same order as the pages in the book, or to copy two facing pages onto both sides of a sheet of paper.

For more information, refer to Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order in Chapter 2 on page 2-53.

Touch [Single [2in1]] on the [Orig. Copy] screen.


When 2in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden, if a different scaling factor is preferred. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2.

Setting for 2-Sided, 2in1 Copying

Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig. Copy] screen. Select [Double [2in1]] and touch [Enter].

1. 2.

Setting for 1-Sided, 4 in 1 Copying

Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig. Copy] screen. Select [Single [4in1]] and touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

When 2in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred. The page order for 4in1 copying can be changed. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

2 - 51

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1. 2.

Setting for 2-Sided, 4 in 1 Copying

Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig. Copy] screen. Select [Double [4in1]] and touch [Enter].

1. 2.

Setting for Booklet Creation

Select [Booklet Creation] and touch [Enter].

Note: When Booklet Creation is selected, depending on the document set direction, the copying page order may change. Refer to Setting a Crease on page 2-36.

2 - 52

i i i i

When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred. The page order for 4in1 copying can be changed. Refer to 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 on page 4-1.

Touch [4in1/Booklet] on the [Orig. Copy] screen.

When 4in1 copying is selected, the scaling factor (which has been preset earlier by the user) is automatically selected. The scaling factor can be overridden if a different scaling factor is preferred. When Booklet Creation is selected, making a crease, and center stapling can be set additionally.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2. 3.

Setting for Copying Bound Documents in Page Order

Adjust the center of the bound document to the mark on the Book Scanner.

Touch [Book] on the [Orig. Copy] screen and select the direction of the bound document on the book screen, and touch [Enter]. Touch [2sided] on the right side of the [Orig. Copy].

4. 5.

Touch [Page Order].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Setting for Copying Bound Documents in page Order is available when 2-Sided copying of a bound document is carried out.

Select [Book-Order] or [Standard] and touch [Enter].


When [Book-Order] is touched, the book is copied in the same order as the original layout. When [Standard] is touched, two facing pages are copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper.

2 - 53

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1. 2.

Setting for Loading a Document

Touch [Original Direction] on the [Orig. Copy] screen. Select the direction of a document and touch [Enter]. Additional information:

1. 2.

Setting for a Margin of a Document

Touch [Margin] on the [Orig. Copy] screen. Select the position for the document margin (left or top).

To Select:
Figures ranging from 0 to 3/4 inch (0 to 20 mm) can be set. Every time the is touched, the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm). Every time the is touched, the set value is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

2 - 54

L M

M L

3.

Use the or arrow to adjust the width of the margin and touch [Enter].

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.9

Attaching Cover Sheets to Copies Different types of paper, such as colored paper, can be used for cover sheets when at least two sets of a document are copied.
Before Starting Operations:
When attaching a cover sheet, the document should be set in the ADF. A cover sheet cannot be attached if the original document is placed in the Book Scanner. Paper to be used for cover sheets should be inserted into a different paper cassette to distinguish it from cassettes with plain copy paper. Cover sheet paper should be inserted in the cassette in the same direction as the plain paper used for copies. Both front and back cover sheets can be attached. Copying is possible on the cover sheet paper.

Methods of Attaching Cover Sheets


There are six variations for attaching cover sheets to a document.

1. Front Cover Sheet - Blank

Back Cover Sheet - None

2. Front Cover Sheet - Blank

Back Cover Sheet - Blank

3. Front Cover Sheet - Blank

Back Cover Sheet - Copied on

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 55

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

4. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on

Back Cover Sheet - None

5. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on

Back Cover Sheet - Blank

6. Front Cover Sheet - Copied on

Back Cover Sheet - Copied on

1. 2. 3.

Attaching Cover Sheets

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Cover Mode].

2 - 56

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

4.

Attaching Cover Sheets (Continued)

Select the method of attaching the Front and Back Covers, and touch the key for the cover sheet paper.

5.

6.

7.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To Select:
Touch the keys for attaching the individual front and back cover sheets. The selected keys are displayed in reverse.

When the paper cassette in which the cover sheet paper is installed is displayed, touch [Enter] instead of the key for cover sheet paper.

Touch the key for the paper cassette containing the cover sheet paper and touch [Enter].

Touch [Enter].

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

2 - 57

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.10

Inserting Separators (Page Insertion) Different types of paper, such as colored paper, can be used as separator sheets when at least two sets of a document are copied.
Before Starting Operations:
This function may not be available depending on the model. The document must be loaded into the ADF for this function to operate. The separator function does not work when using the Book Scanner. Paper of a different size or direction must be inserted into the original document at the required separator position. Paper used for the separator (printed output) should be installed into a different paper cassette than the normal print paper cassette. Copying is possible on the paper used for separator sheets. This function can be used together with the cover sheet function. This function cannot be used together with Booklet Creation or when using mixed documents.

Examples of Inserting Separators Separators are inserted into the copies wherever paper of a different size or direction is found in the original document during copying. Non-Copied Inserts

Copied Inserts

2 - 58

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.

Inserting the Separators

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.

2. 3.

Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Page Insertion].

4.

Select [With Image] or [Blank] on the separator sheet (whether to print on the sheet), and touch the key for the cassette containing the separator paper.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Be sure to insert different sized paper (into the original document) in the position that separator sheets placement is required. For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

If the paper cassette in which the separator paper is installed is displayed, touch [Enter] instead of the key for the separator paper.

Touch the key of the paper cassette containing the separator paper and touch [Enter].

2 - 59

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

6.

Inserting the Separators (Continued)

Touch [Enter].

7.
2.11

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copying and Overhead Projector Interleaving Separators can be inserted between the Overhead Projector (OHP) transparency copies as they are printed.
Before Starting Operations:
Paper for the separators should be installed in a paper cassette. The OHP sheets should be installed in the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. Paper with the same size as the OHP sheets should be used for the separator and inserted in the same direction. Copying is possible on the separators (interleaves). Using this feature, numbers of copies cannot be selected.

Examples of Inserting Separators between OHP Sheets Separators can be inserted between OHP sheets and can be either blank or can have copy printed on them. Non-Copied Interleaves (Blank)

Copied Interleaves (Copied Image)

2 - 60

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2. 3.

Inserting OHP Interleaves

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [OHP Interleaving].

4.

Select [With Image] or [Blank] on the OHP Interleaving screen.

5.

Touch the key for the separator paper.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

If the paper cassette in which the OHP sheets are installed is displayed, this operation is not required.

2 - 61

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

6.

Inserting OHP Interleaves (Continued)

Touch the key for the paper cassette in which the OHP Interleaving sheets are installed, then touch [Enter].

7.

Touch [Enter].

8.
2.12

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Setting Up File Margins Margins for binding a file can be set up by shifting the image while still including all the printing area. The position of the binder margin can be selected either at the left side edge or at the top edge. The margin width can also be selected.

Left side edge

Top edge

2 - 62

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1. 2. 3.

Setting Up File Margins

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [File Margin].

Copying Style:
When Left is selected for the file margin position, both the front and back of the document is copied in the same direction as the original.

When Top is selected, the back of the document is copied upside-down to the original document.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4.

Touch the [ ] key to set the file margin position (at the left or at the top).

2 - 63

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

To Select:
Figures ranging from 0 to 3/4 inch (0 to 20 mm) can be set. Every time the DOWN arrow is touched, the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm). Every time the UP arrow is touched, the set value is increased by 1/16 inch(1 mm).

6.
2.13

The copy image may be lost if the file margin width is set more than is necessary. An appropriate size must be set for the file margin width.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Erasing a Portion of the Document Some areas of the document can be erased to eliminate shadow marks left from the punched holes, or other marks. It is also convenient for erasing header data from facsimiles and any other printing in border areas. To Erase:

Left edge erasing mode

1. 2.
2 - 64

Erase Mode

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

M L

5.

Setting Up File Margins (Continued)

Use the [ ]or [ ] arrow to select the file margin width, then touch [Enter].

i i

Top edge erasing mode

Frame erasing mode

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

3.

Erase Mode (Continued)

Select [Auxiliary], and touch [Edge/Frame Erase].

To Select:
Figures ranging from 1/4 to 3/4 inch (5 to 20 mm) can be set. Every time [ ] arrow is touched, the set value is decreased by 1/16 inch (1 mm). Every time [ ] arrow is touched, the set value is increased by 1/16 inch (1 mm).

6.

The width to be erased is in accordance to the original documents dimensions. Therefore, care must be taken when enlarging or reducing the image so that no information is lost or distorted.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

M L

5.

Touch [ ] or [ ] arrow to select the width to be erased, then touch [Enter].

L M

4.

Touch [ ] arrow to set the erased position. Choices are: Left Edge erase, Top Edge erase, or Frame erase.

i i

2 - 65

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.14

Repeated Copying on a Single Sheet One sheet of a document can be repeatedly copied onto one sheet of copy paper. Examples of Image Repeating When Ledger (11" by 17") is selected as the copy paper size and direct mode is set as the zoom ratio to copy a Letter-sized document:

1. 2. 3.

2 - 66

When Letter (8 1/2" by 11") is selected as the paper size and 0.500 (50%) is set as the zoom ratio to copy a Letter-sized document:

Image Repeating

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary], and touch [Image Repeat].

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

4.

Image Repeating (Continued)

Select the document size.

Automatic Size Detection: 1. Touch [Auto Detect], then touch [Enter].

Regular Size (Letter or Legal): 1. Touch [Size Input]. 2. Select the document size, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 67

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Image Repeating (Continued)

Irregular Size (any size other than Letter/Legal) 1. Touch [Size Input]. 2. Touch [Custom Size].

Irregular Size (Continued) 3. Touch [X ] to enter the horizontal length and [Y ] to enter the vertical length of the original, then touch [Enter].

5.

Touch [Enter].

6.
2 - 68

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

To Select:
Touching [X] and [Y] moves the cursor. When selecting the dimensions, enter the size after touching [X] or [Y]. Width (X) can be set ranging from 1 to 17 inches (25 to 432 mm). Length (Y) can be set ranging from 1 to 11 11/16 inches (25 to 297 mm). Use [ ] or [ ] arrow to select the width and length.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.15

Numbering Each Set of Copies Printing a number for each printed set of a document is possible. The number is printed as a background image and can be useful to track distribution of copied sets, or when handling confidential documents.
Before Starting Operations:
Numbers are printed as a background image for each copied set. When the Distribution function is set, sort mode is automatically selected as the finishing setting. Three levels of contrast can be selected for the printed numbers. When the printed number reach 999, the number resets to 000. The initial number can be selected by the operator.

1. 2. 3.

Setting for the Numbering Function

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary], then touch [Image Settings].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 69

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

4.

Setting for the Numbering Function (Continued)

Touch [Distribution #].

5.

Select the Distribution function.

Selecting the Initial Printed Number: 1. Use the 10-key pad to enter the initial number.

Selecting Which Pages are Numbered: 1. Touch [First page only] or [All Pages].

Selecting the Contrast for the Printed Number:

6.
2 - 70

1. Select the desired contrast for the printed number. Choices are: [Darker], [Normal], and [Lighter]. Touch [Enter].

i i i

To Select:
Numbers can range from 000 to 999. To set the initial number to 003, enter 3.

If no initial number is set, numbering starts at 001.

To Select:
When [First page only] is touched, the number will just be printed on the first page of each printed set. When [All Pages] is touched, every page of the set is printed with the distribution number.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

7.
2.16

Setting for the Numbering Function (Continued)

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Printing a Water Mark on the Copy Paper A special message, called a Water Mark, can be printed on the papers background when copying. Examples include [TOP SECRET] [CONFIDENTIAL] [DRAFT], etc.
Before Starting Operations:
There are seven Water Mark messages. The Water Mark can be printed on the first page or on all the pages.

1. 2. 3.

Printing a Water Mark on the Paper

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select the [Auxiliary] menu and touch [Image Settings].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

2 - 71

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

4.

Printing a Water Mark on the Paper

Touch [Water Mark].

5.

Select the Water Mark to print.

6. 7.

Touch [Enter]. Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

2 - 72

i i

To select the Water Mark:


Touch the key for the mark you want printed. When selected, the key will be highlighted. Touch [Cancel] to cancel.

To set the pages for the Water Mark:


Touch either [First Page Only] or [All Pages]. [First Page Only]: Touch this to print the Water Mark only on the first copied page. [All Pages]: Touch this to print the Water mark on all copied pages.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.17

Black-White Reverse Copying This feature reverses the black/white contrast of the manuscript when copying.
Before Starting Operations:
Images created by the machine, such as Distribution Number or a Water Mark, will not be reversed. The black/white image cannot be reversed after the document has been already been scanned.

1. 2. 3.

Black-White Reverse Copying

Load the document in the unit.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary], then touch [Black-White Reverse].

4.
2.18

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Separate Scanning When a document with a large number of pages is copied, the whole set can be copied by dividing the pages for scanning. When the Numbering function is set, a multiple-paged document can be copied with continuous numbering.
Before Starting Operations:
Scanning is suspended when memory becomes full. In this case, press <Start> to print the document until the stage that has already been scanned.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

[Black-White Reverse] will be highlighted.

2 - 73

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1. 2. 3.

Using the Book Scanner for Separate Scanning

Load the document in the Book Scanner.


For more information, Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>. Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Separate Scan].

4.

Press <Start>. Scanning will now begin.

5.

After scanning is complete, load the next document page in the Book Scanner, then press <Start>.

2 - 74

Repeat this operation until the whole document is completely scanned.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

6.

Using the Book Scanner for Separate Scanning (Continued)

Touch [Finish] when all scanning is completed.

7. 1. 2. 3.

Using the Automatic Document Feeder for Separate Scanning

Select [Auxiliary] and touch [Separate Scan].

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To add documents to be scanned:


Touch [Continue] to re-start scanning. Place the page on the glass and press <Start>.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.


For more information, refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 on page 1-31.

Press <Copy>.

Press <Start>. The document will now begin to scan.


To Suspend Scanning:
Press <Stop>.

2 - 75

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

5.

Using the Automatic Document Feeder for Separate Scanning (Continued)

After scanning is complete, load the next document page in the feeder, then press [Continue].

6.

7.
2.19

Using Copy Programs Copying functions used frequently can be registered and accessed as necessary. For example, if you frequently use the same zoom and density settings, these parameters can be registered into a key for convenient recall.
Before Starting Operations:
Registration is required in advance. For details on Copy Program registration, refer to Section 3.2 Registering Copy Programs in Chapter 4 on page 4-84. The following items can be registered in combination as Copy Programs:
Number of Copies Zoom Sorting Cover Sheets OHP Interleaving Image Settings Separate Scanning Copy Paper Size Density Mixed Original Detection

2 - 76

Repeat this operation until the whole document is completely scanned.

Touch [Finish] when all scanning is completed.

Press <Start>. Copying will now begin.

Copy Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Edge/Frame Erase File Margin Image Repeating

Page Insertion Black-White Reverse

1. 2.

Using the Copy Programs

Press <Utility>, and select [Copy Job Recall]. Select the program to be used.

3.

Load the document and <Start>. Copying will now begin.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To select the copy program:


Only keys in which copy programs are registered are displayed. Touch the key with the desired functions programmed.

2 - 77

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 78

Copy Operations

Chapter 3

Registration and Setting Operations

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter describes how to register information into the NEC IT3520/IT2520 and how to enable its many useful features.

1.1

Describing the Registration and Setting Screens The main Registration and Setting displays are accessed by pressing the <Utility> key. The screen shown below includes keys that are indicated only when the optional devices are connected.

Figure 3-1 Main Utility Screen

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.2

User Set Screen The screen shown below is for registration of various functions.

Figure 3-2 User Set Screen

1.3

Copy Job Program Recall Screen This screen displays copy job programs.

Figure 3-3 Copy Job Program Recall Screen

3-2

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.4

User Management Screen The screen shown is for setting the basic management operations and for routine care to use the NEC IT3520/IT2520 properly.

Figure 3-4 User Management Screen

1.5

Administrator Management Screen When in the Registration screen, touching the Administrator key gives access to the Administrator Management screen. Access to the Administrator Management screen is restricted to those user(s) having an Administrator Code. While in this screen, the machines administrator can register and set features that are restricted from normal users. The Administrator Management Screen is composed of two screens: [Admin. 1] and [Admin. 2]. Refer to Figure 3-5 Administrator Management Screens.

Figure 3-5 Administrator Management Screens

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.6

Report Screen This screen is used to print various reports/lists (used to confirm the status of the machine), and the status of registration of various functions.

Figure 3-6 Report Screen

1.7

Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation In order to properly use and benefit from this product, certain information must be registered in advance. Items such as the current date and time, the Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI), Self-ID, Self Telephone Number, One-Touch numbers, etc., are needed to use the machine to its full capabilities. Various settings, including settings for printing styles of reports, have already been set at the factory before shipment. Those settings (defaults) can be changed to meet the needs of the business. The following items must be registered before use: Time and Date Self-Telephone Number - the telephone number of the fax line. TSI - the name of your company or business and the facsimile number that is printed at the top of every transmitted fax page. Self-ID - the name of the company and the facsimile number which may be displayed on the receivers machine.

3-4

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

It is recommended that the following items be registered to effectively use the unit: One-Touch Dialing keys Index keys Programmed keys

1.8

This section explains how characters are entered as part of the registration process for items such as the TSI, One-Touch keys, and any other feature that requires characters.
Before Starting Operations:
Use the character keys to select the desired characters. Use the 10-key Pad to enter numeric information.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Entering Characters for Registration

Entering Characters

Alphanumeric Screen: This screen is used to enter alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Characters entered will appear in this area

Character selection area

] [

: Moves the Cursor. : Deletes the character at the cursor position. : Enters a space. : Touch to display the symbol screen. : Touch to enter uppercase characters.

[ Del. ] [ SPACE ] [Alpha ] [Caps ]

3-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Symbol Screen: This screen is used to enter the symbols.

Characters entered will appear in this area

Character selection area

] [

: Moves the Cursor. : Deletes the character at the cursor position. : Enters a space. : Touch to display the alphanumeric screen. : Touch to enter uppercase characters.

[ Del. ] [ SPACE ] [ Symbol ] [ Caps ]

The and ~ keys will display as ~ (tilde).

Entering Alphanumeric Characters and Symbols

1.

Touch a character key to enter the character.

To enter Capital (uppercase) characters:


Touch [Caps] character. before entering the

To enter Symbols:
Touch [Alpha] to display the Symbol screen.

To delete characters:
Move the cursor over the character to be deleted and touch [Del.]. Touch [ ][ ] to move the cursor.

To clear all characters:


Press <C> (Clear key).

3-6

i i i i i

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Entering Alphanumeric Characters and Symbols (Continued)

2.

Touch [Enter]. The characters are registered.

SECTION 2

BASIC SETTINGS AND REGISTRATION OPERATION


In order for the NEC IT3520/2520 to properly and efficiently run, it is necessary to set certain functions and register information into the machine. This is typically done by a single key user, or administrator, who is in charge of seeing that parameters such as passwords, report printing, date and time accuracy, facsimile numbers, and others are properly entered. These basic settings and registration details will be covered in the following sections.

2.1

Basic Settings This section will explain setting items required for basic operation of the NEC IT3520/2520. The following are basic settings: Setting the Confirmation Beep, Alarm Buzzer, and Line Monitor Volume

Setting the Confirmation Beep, Alarm Buzzer, and Line Monitor Volume: You can adjust the volume of the confirmation beep of the touch panel, the alarm volume (paper out, paper jam, communication error, etc.), and the line monitor volume (ringer tone, facsimile answer tone, etc.).
Setting the Volume

1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i


If [Enter] is not displayed:


According to the registration screen, another key (such as [Next]) may be displayed instead of [Enter].

Press <Utility>.

3-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Volume (Continued)

2.

Select [User Management].

3.

Select the sound volume to be adjusted.

To Select:
Six volume levels (0 to 5) can be set. The sound gets louder as the number gets larger. Set to 0 to turn off the sound.

5.
3-8

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

4.

i i i i

To set the Confirmation beep:


Touch [Confirmation Beep] to set the volume of the touch panel key manipulation. The default setting is 3. It also beeps when the operation is not accepted.

To set the Alarm volume:


Touch [Alarm Volume] to set the alarm volume, which is heard whenever a problem develops (such as a paper jam). The default setting is 3.

To set the Line Monitor Volume:


Touch [Line Monitor Volume] to set the speaker volume heard when the machine dials a facsimile number, for example. The default setting is 3.

Touch [ ] or [ ] to select the volume, then touch [Enter].

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.2

Accessing the Administrator Management Screen This section describes how to access the Administrator Management screen and how various functions are set and information registered. The administrator is typically the person who manages the machine and is responsible for seeing that all aspects of using the unit are maintained.
Accessing the Administrator Management Screen

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Select [Admin. Management].

3.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Administrator Number (up to eight digits), then touch [Enter].

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

This screen is not displayed unless an Administrator Number has been registered. Refer to Section 2.8 Registering the Administrator Number on page 3-22.

Select either [Admin. 1] or [Admin. 2], and on the Administrator Management screen choose the function for registration and set.

3-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Accessing the Administrator Management Screen (Continued)

5.

After completing registration or setting, touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the stand-by screen is displayed.

2.3

Setting the Date and Time Before starting to use the machine, the current date and time should be set. This setting is very important, as all reports, transmissions, and receptions will have the date and time printed on them. Whats more, any timed operation (e.g. Timer Transmission, Polling, Broadcasting, etc.) depends on the correct date and time.
Before Starting Operations:
Enter the calendar year in the four-digit format. Enter the time in the 24-hour format. If the date and time need adjustment, use the same procedure to correct them.

Setting the Date and Time

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Date/Time Set].

3 - 10

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Date and Time (Continued)

3.

Touch [Time Date].

4.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the date and time.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To setup:
Use the 10-key pad to enter the data in the order of year, month, date, hour, and minute. Example: 11:32, April 23, 2003, touch: [2] [0] [0] [3] [0] [4] [2] [3] [1] [1] [3] [2]. To adjust the date or time, touch the key ([Year] [Month] [Hour] [Minute]) needed to adjust.

To modify:
Press <Clear> (Clear key) and re-enter the data.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.4

Setting the Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time The time zone can be set in accordance with the location of the machine. For example, if the IT3520/IT2520 is installed in New York, the time zone setting is set for -5:00 GMT (Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is the world-wide time reference standard, where clocks can be set in accordance to the time in Greenwich, England). A setting for Daylight Saving Time can also be set.
Before Starting Operations:
The time zone setting that is attached to the e-mail header transmission and reception can be set to a 30-minute difference from standard time. The standard time zone for North America (east coast) market models is set to -5:00 UTC. The factory default setting is -5:00.

Setting the Time Zone

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Date/Time Set].

3 - 12

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Time Zone

3.

Touch [Time Zone].

5. 1. 2.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting Daylight Saving Time (D.S.T.)

Touch [D.S.T.]. Touch [Auto] or [OFF] to set the Daylight Saving Time.

The factory default setting is [Auto]. When in the [Auto] setting, one hour is automatically added to the units clock on the first Sunday in April, and one hour is subtracted on the last Sunday in October. For those areas not observing D.S.T., the setting should be [OFF].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4.

Touch [ ] or [ ] to set the proper time zone, then touch [Enter].

i i i

3 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Language for TSI, Reports, etc.

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administration Management screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Language (Com.)].

3.

Select one of the languages, then touch [Enter].

4.

3 - 14

Some of the reports stay in English, even if you select another language.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the standby screen.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.5

Registering the Telephone Number This section explains the method of registering the Self-Telephone Number, PSTN/Extension Line Switch, and Line Type for sending and receiving a Fax. About the Telephone Number: Self-Telephone Number - This is simply the facsimile telephone number used at this machine, and it identifies this unit at the remote destination. PSTN/Extension Line Switch - When connected to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX), the unit may not correctly execute facsimile communication as is. A setting is made to allow communication via a PBX. The factory default is set for use on an external line (not connected to a PBX). Line Type - There are two methods of dialing on telephone lines: Touchtone dialing (PB) and Dial-Pulse (DP10, DP20) dialing. Dialing a facsimile telephone number is impossible if the correct method of dialing does not match the type of line used were the machine is installed. Register the type of dialing method used by the NEC IT3520/IT2520. PB (Push Button, or Touch-tone style) dialing is the factory default setting.

1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Before Starting Operations:


Up to 20-digits can be registered as the number. This number may be printed on report(s) or list(s) at the destination. It is recommended that the full telephone number be registered (including the area code) and that this number be corrected if a new facsimile telephone number is issued. This same procedure is used to modify a currently registered Self-Telephone Number.

Registering and Modifying the Self-Telephone Number

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

3 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering and Modifying the Self-Telephone Number (Continued)

2.

Touch [Self-telephone # Information].

3.

4.

3 - 16

i i i

When the 2nd G3 Port model is used:


When the optional 2nd G3 Port is installed, two separate facsimile telephone numbers will be issued. Touch [Self-telephone #1 Information], or [Self-telephone #2 Information] to register each facsimile number.

Touch [Self-telephone #].

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile telephone number, then touch [Enter].
To re-enter the number:
Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> (Clear key) to re-enter it. Touch [Delete] to erase a character on the cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

To use International Codes:


Touch [+] to register the International telephone code, and enter 1 as the country code for the United States.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting for an External Line or PBX

1.

Touch [PSTN/Ext Line Switch].

2.

Select [Extension] or [PSTN].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To select:
Touch [PSTN] to connect directly to a telephone line. Touch [Extension] to connect to a telephone line via the PBX (for example, if a 9 must be dialed to gain access to an outside line).

To select [PSTN]: 1. Touch [PSTN] and [Enter]. To select [Extension]: 1. Touch [Extension]. 2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the digit required by the PBX to access an external line, then touch [Enter]. 3. Touch [Enter] again.

3 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Line Type

1.

Touch [Line Type].

2.

Select the key for the telephone line type currently used, then touch [Enter].

3.

4.

3 - 18

i i

To select:
[DP20] - touch this when a 20 pulses per second dial line is used. [DP10] - touch this when a 10 pulses per second dial line is used. [PB] - touch this when a Touch-tone type line is used. This will be the majority of cases.

Confirm the dial type when the screen returns to the same as in step 1. Touch [Enter] if the data is correct.
To modify:
Touch [Line Type] to change the setting.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.6

Registering the Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) The TSI is the main identification of the NEC IT3520/2520. The TSI consists of the business (or company name) and the facsimile telephone number of the machine. It is much like the Self-ID, however, the TSI is send to the receiving machine and prints at the top of every received page as an important identifier.
Before Starting Operations:
A maximum of eight TSI can be registered. destination or department. Different TSI may be set for each

The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It is illegal not to register this TSI, or to turn off this feature. Refer to Section 1.5 Transmitter Subscribers Identification in Regulatory and Safety Information on page 6. Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be registered in the TSI. The same procedure is used to modify the TSI.

Registering and Modifying the TSI

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [TSI Registration].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering and Modifying the TSI (Continued)

3.

Select the TSI to register.

4.

Enter the TSI, then touch [Enter].


Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

5.

Confirm the registered TSI when the screen returns to the same as in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the TSI is correct.

6.

3 - 20

To modify:
Touch [TSI] to re-register.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.7

Registering the Self-ID The Self-ID is the name of your company and the machines facsimile number that prints on the management report and also is displayed on the panel of the receiving unit. It is convenient for allowing the destination to confirm who sent a document.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to 12 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be registered as the ID. This same procedure is used to modify an existing Self-ID. The Self-ID may not be displayed at the destination (depends on maker and model). In this case, the Self-Telephone Number is displayed.

Self-ID Registration and Modification

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Initial Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Self-ID].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Self-ID Registration and Modification (Continued)

3.

Enter the Self-ID and touch [Enter].


Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

4.

Confirm the registration details after the display returns to the screen shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

5.
2.8

Registering the Administrator Number Responsibility of registering information into the NEC IT3520/2520 and setting functions in the machine is performed by the administrator. To enter into the Administrator Management Mode, the administrator must first enter an administrator number. This number is simply a password to prohibit unauthorized users from modifying registered information.
Before Starting Operations:
If an administrator number is not registered, the administrator management menu can still be operated without entering a number.

3 - 22

To modify:
Touch [Self-ID] to re-register.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Administrator Number

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Admin. Set].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Administrator Number].

3.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the password of the administrator (up to eight digits), then touch [Enter].

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> to reenter the number. When [Delete] is touched, the character on the cursor is deleted. When [Cancel] is touched, it returns to the initial status.

Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.
To modify:
Touch [Administrator Number] to reregister.

3 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Administrator Number (Continued)

5.
2.9

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Account Management Mode Unauthorized use of the NEC IT3520/2520 can be prohibited, or the number of copies made by each account can be restricted. Passwords are set for each department, or for individual account.
Before Starting Operations:
When Limited is set, the unit cannot be used without selecting the account (department or individual account). The factory default setting is Open.

Setting the Account Management Mode

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Account Management].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Account Management Mode].

3 - 24

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Account Management Mode (Continued)

3.

Select [Limited] or [Open], then touch [Enter].

4.

Account Selection Screen displays.

2.10

Registering Accounts When account registration is completed for individual users or departments in a company, each Account can restrict the number of pages that can be printed per account. Unauthorized use can be avoided by registering a password for each user or department. User Registration items: Account Name: Accounts (department or individual user) name is registered. Up to 12 characters may be registered. Access Number: Register this to restrict the accounts. Account Number: Register a number for each account. Maximum Print Page: This is set to restrict the number of pages that can be printed per account. Input range is 0 to 999, 999 pages.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i
   

If Open is selected:
The display returns to the stand-by screen when [Open] is selected.

3 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering Accounts

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [Account Reg].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Touch a key that is not yet registered.

3.

3 - 26

If a key has already been registered, the information can be changed by touching that key.

Registering account information. Registering the Accounts Name: 1. Touch [Account Name].

2. Enter the Account Name, then touch [Enter].

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering Accounts (Continued)

Registering the Access Number: 1. Touch [Access Number].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Access Number (six digits), then touch [Enter].

Registering the Accounts Number: 1. Touch [Account Number].

2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the Accounts Number (four digits), then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

When an Access Number has not been registered, the user selection screen can be used without entering an Access number. Press <C> to re-enter a number. Touch [Cancel] to return to the initial screen.

Press <C> to re-enter the number.

3 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering Accounts (Continued)

Registering the Maximum Print Page Setting: 1. Touch [Max. Print Page]. 2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the maximum number of sheets to be printed, then touch [Enter].

4.

Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 3. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.

To modify:
Touch the key for the item to be modified and re-register it.

5.
2.11

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering Passwords for Secured Communications Passwords can be registered that allow both reception and transmission of facsimiles only when a match is made with the reception or transmission site. These passwords offer a level of security so the facsimile is sent to, or received by, the correct party. This section describes registering a password to carry out password communications.
Before Starting Operations:
A communication password is used for Password Transmission or Password Reception.

3 - 28

i i

Enter 000000 for no printing limit.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

The password-protected transmission (Password TX On) setting is reset upon completion of each transmission. For details, refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1. The factory default setting is Password not required for reception (Communication Password:00). For details, refer to Section 3.2 Selecting Password Reception in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-32.

Registering the Password for Password Communications

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management Screen, and touch [FAX Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen on page 3-9.

2.

Select [Password Com.] and touch [Com. Password].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Password for Password Communications (Continued)

3.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the communication password (two digits), then touch [Enter].

4.

5.
2.12

Registering One-Touch Keys One-Touch keys add the convenience and speed of dialing a pre-registered facsimile number, along with other registered data, at the touch of a single key. Misdialing a facsimile number is eliminated and the user can quickly and accurately send their document. Items to be registered: Destination Name: The One-Touch key is labeled with the destinations name or location. Up to 12 characters can be registered. Destination Number: Register the telephone number (64-digits maximum), transmission speed, F-Code. Communication Mode: Register the communication mode.

3 - 30

i i
  

To re-enter the number:


Press <C> (clear key) and re-enter the number. When [Cancel] is touched, it returns to the initial status.

Confirm the setting details when the screen returns as that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if the setting is correct.
To modify:
Touch [Com. Password] to re-register.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Before Starting Operations:


There are 36 One-Touch dial screens, and up to 540 destinations can be registered (15 destinations per screen X 36 screens = 540 destinations). It is easier to retrieve the destinations by making an index to classify them when they are registered. Refer to Section 2.13 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys on page 3-39. Make sure that the facsimile number is registered correctly to avoid erroneous dialing and incomplete transmissions. The registered data can be modified or deleted. Also, the display position of the OneTouch key can be modified.

Confirmation of the Registered Details: A One-Touch list can be printed to verify the data. Refer to Section 1.3 Printing the One-Touch Key List in Chapter 7 Reports and Lists on page 7-4.
Registering One-Touch Keys

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [User Set].

2.

Touch [FAX Input].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering One-Touch Keys (Continued)

3.

Touch [One-Touch].

4.

Select the desired One-Touch key to be registered.

5.

6.

3 - 32

i i i i

The initial screen for the Index is automatically displayed. Touch [ ][ ], [Index List], or the tab for the index to search for the desired One-Touch key.

Enter the destinations name to be displayed on the One-Touch key, then touch [Next].
These symbols are not available for One-Touch keys:
" ^ \ | ; : * / ? . , ( ) [ ] < >

Select the communications mode, then touch [Next].


This screen is displayed only when the optional 2nd G3 Port is installed. [G3-1] and [G3-2] represent the two facsimile telephone lines connected to the machine. This setting selects which line the machine will choose when dialing a destination.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering One-Touch Keys (Continued)

7.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [Next].

8.

9.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

The destinations facsimile number can be up to 64 digits. A three second pause may be added to the number by pressing <Pause>. If the NEC IT3520/2520 is set for dial pulse (DP) dialing, a touchtone can be dialed by touching [Tone]. Refer to Overseas (International) Transmission on page 3-34, and Registering the F-Code on page 3-34, as needed.

Confirm the registered information. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.


To modify:
Select the item to modify and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.
To register consecutively:
Repeat the procedure from step 3.

3 - 33

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Overseas (International) Transmission

1. 2.

Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch Keys.
Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [Overseas].

3. 4. 5. 1.

Registering the F-Code

3 - 34

i i

[Overseas] is displayed in reverse, showing that this mode is enabled.

Touch [Next]. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.
To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch Keys.
Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the F-Code (Continued)

2.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination, then touch [F-CODE].

3.

Select the key for the item to be registered.


Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

4.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the F-Code, then touch [Enter].

5. 6. 7.

Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Next]. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 35

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Communications Speed

1. 2.

Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 6 under Registering the One-Touch key. Set the communication speed: 1. Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination then touch [Speed].

4. 5. 6.

Touch [Next]. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 36

3.

Touch [ ] or [ ] to select the communication speed, then touch [Enter].

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Modifying and Deleting Information

1. 2. 3.

Perform the same procedure as in steps 1 to 3 under Registering One-Touch Keys.


Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

Touch a One-Touch key to be modified. Select the tab for the item to be modified, then change the registered details.

4. 5. 1.

Copying a One-Touch Key

Perform the same procedure as steps 1 to 7 under Registering One-Touch Keys.


Refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To modify:
Select the tab for the item to be modified from: [Dest.], [Mode1], and [Mode 2] menus. For details, refer to Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-31.

To delete:
Confirm the registered details, and touch [Del.].

Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.


To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 37

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Copying a One-Touch Key

2.

Select [One-Touch] and touch [One-Touch Copy].

3.

Touch the desired One-Touch Key.

4. 5.

Confirm that the One-Touch Key has been copied. Touch [Enter] if it is correct. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 38

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.13

Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys It is much easier to operate the NEC IT3520/IT2520 if the one-touch keys have been registered in an organized fashion (e.g. by region, branch, alphabetically, etc.). The Index Keys provide a convenient method of organizing the one-touch keys.
Before Starting Operations:
The index key name can be up to eight characters. There are 36 index keys, and up to 540 destinations can be registered (up to 15 destination per index key display page).

Index tab

Registering Index Keys

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Select [User Set], then touch [FAX Input].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

3 - 39

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering Index Keys (Continued)

3.

Touch [Index].

4.

Select an index key to be registered.

5.

Enter the index key name, then touch [Enter].


Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

6.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 40

To register consecutively:
Repeat the procedure from step 3.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.14

Registering Program Keys Program keys are special keys registered to carry out routine functions at the touch of a single key. If the same action is performed frequently (such as sending documents to multiple destinations at a specific time, or making a 2-sided transmission with a certain image quality, etc.), the program key may be registered so that all the needed features occur at the touch of a key. Details that can be Registered: The following three types of programs can be registered, as well as destination data. Transmission Program: Image Quality, Contrast, Reduction, Real-time Transmission, Priority Transmission, Timer Transmission, TSI, Destination Insertion, Transmission Report, Remote Copying, Password Transmission, 2in1 Transmission, 2-Sided Transmission, and TX Marker stamping can be registered in program keys. Batch Program: Documents being sent to a common destination are stored into memory all during the day. At a programmed time, all the documents are then transmitted to the desired destination. Polling Reception Program: The time to perform a polling reception can be registered.

Confirmation of the Registered Details: A Program key list can be printed to confirm the registered data. Refer to Section 1.4 Printing the FAX Program List in Chapter 7 Reports and Lists on page 7-6.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to 30 program keys can be registered. However, there cannot be more than 540 facsimile and one-touch keys in total. The name of the program key can be up to 12 characters. Destinations must be pre-registered as one-touch before they can be registered in a program key. Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys on page 3-30.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

  

3 - 41

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Transmission Program

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Select [User Set], then touch [FAX Input].

3.

Touch [FAX Program].

4.

Select the One-Touch key to be registered.

5.

3 - 42

The initial screen for the Index is automatically displayed. Touch [ ] [ ], [Index List], or the tab for the index to search for the desired One-Touch key.

Enter the program name to be displayed on the FAX Program key, then touch [Next].
Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration on page 3-5.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

6.

Select [TX] and touch [Next].

7.

Select the destination.

8. 9.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

Using a One-Touch key:


Touch [One-Touch], touch the onetouch key for the destination, and touch [Enter].

Using Name Search:


Touch [Search] and select destination, then touch [Enter]. the

Using Serial Broadcast Transmission:


Select all destinations to be sent.

When the destination is not registered:


Touch [No dest.].

Touch [Next]. Touch [Transmission Setting].

3 - 43

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

10.
i

Select the functions to be registered. Touch [Enter] when finished.


To select:
The Image Quality, Reduction, Contrast, and Scan Area can be selected on the [Quality] screen. When the [FAX Menu] is touched, the following functions can be selected. Real-Time Transmission Transmission Report Priority Transmission Remote Copying Timer Transmission Password Transmission TSI 2in1 Transmission Destination Insert 2-Sided Transmission Rotation Transmission TX Marker (option)

11.

3 - 44

Timer and Real-Time Transmission cannot be selected concurrently. If two or more destinations are selected and the Real-Time Transmission is also used, the Real-Time Transmission setting is reset. When 2in1 Transmission is selected, [Auto Size] is selected as the zoom ratio.

Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.
To modify:
Select the item to modify and reregister it.

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Transmission Program (Continued)

12.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the standby screen returns.

Register the Batch Program

1.

Perform the same steps as in steps 1~5 under Registering the Transmission Program.
Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

2.

Select [Batch], then touch [Next].

3.

Select the destination.

4.

Touch [Next].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To consecutively register
Repeat the steps from step 4.

Using a One-Touch key:


Touch the [One-Touch] key, touch the One-Touch key for the destination, then touch [Enter].

Using Search:
Touch [Search] to select the destination by spelling. Touch [Enter] after selecting the destination.

3 - 45

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Register the Batch Program (Continued)

5.

Set the time and interval for transmission.

Setting the Hour: 1. Touch [Hour]. 2. Enter the digits using the 10-key Pad.

Setting the Minutes: 1. Touch [Minute]. 2. Enter the digits using the 10-key Pad.

Setting the Transmission Interval: 1. Touch [Every Hours]. 2. Enter the digits using the 10-key Pad.

6.

Touch [Next].

3 - 46

i i i

Numbers ranging from 0~23 may be entered.

Numbers ranging from 00~59 may be entered.

Set the length of time for the transmission interval (01~24 hours).

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Register the Batch Program (Continued)

7.

Touch [Transmission Setting].

8.

Select functions to be registered. Touch [Enter] after selecting all of them.

9.

Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

10.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To select:
The Image Quality, Reduction, Contrast, and Scan Area can be selected on the [Quality] screen. When [Menu 1] is touched, the following functions can be selected. TSI 2in1 Transmission Destination Insert 2-Sided Transmission Transmission Report Password Transmission Rotation Transmission TX Marker (option)

When 2in1 Transmission is selected, [Auto-Size] is selected and the zoom ration.

To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

3 - 47

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Polling Reception Program

1.

Perform the same steps as those of 1~5 under Registering the Transmission Program.
Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

2.

Select [Polling RX], then touch [Next].

3.

Select the destination.

4. 5.

6.

3 - 48

i i

Using a One-Touch key:


Touch the [One-Touch] key, touch the One-Touch key for the destination, then touch [Enter].

Using Search:
Touch [Search] to select the destination by spelling. Touch [Enter] after selecting the destination.

Touch [Next]. Touch [Timer Set].

Selecting the time for starting Polling Reception:

Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Polling Reception Program (Continued)

Setting the Hour: 1. Touch [Hour]. 2. Enter the digits using the 10-key Pad.

Setting the Minutes: 1. Touch [Minute]. 2. Enter the digits using the 10-key Pad.

When the Time is not desired:

7. 8.

1. Touch [Timer OFF]. Touch [Enter]. Confirm the details that have been registered in the program key. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

9. 1.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Modifying and Deleting Data

Perform the same steps as those of 1 to 3 under Registering the Transmission Program.
Refer to Registering the Transmission Program on page 3-42.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Numbers ranging from 0~23 may be entered.

Numbers ranging from 00~59 may be entered.

3 - 49

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Modifying and Deleting Data (Continued)

2. 3.

Touch the facsimile program key to be modified. Touch the key for the item to be modified, and modify the registered details.

Batch Program:

Polling Reception Program:

4. 5.
3 - 50

Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

To modify:
Select the item to be modified, and reregister it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

i i i i i i

All registered details are cleared when the program type is modified.

Transmission Program:
To modify:
Select the key for the item to be modified from the choices in the display.

To delete:
Confirm the registered details, and touch [Delete] to erase the information.

To modify:
Select the key for the item to be modified from the choices in the display.

To delete:
Confirm the registered details, and touch [Delete] to erase the information.

To modify:
Select the key for the item to be modified from the choices in the display.

To delete:
Confirm the registered details, and touch [Delete] to erase the information.

Registration and Setting Operations

Chapter 4

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter describes the advanced registration items, and the setting of advanced features of the NEC IT 3520/IT2520.

SECTION 2

ADVANCED SETTINGS

2.1

Changing the Initial Settings Initial settings when carrying out panel reset while the NEC IT3520/IT2520 is turned ON can be changed into a use situation. When the NEC IT 3520/ IT2520 is turned ON, or when panel reset is carried out, it becomes unnecessary to set up a copy and a fax function again, if it sets up according to the situation used most often. The following items can be set according to the users choice: Memory Recall: Sets whether the Memory Recall function is used. The factory default setting is OFF. Mixed Original Detection: Sets whether the Mixed Original Detection mode is set as the default. The factory default is OFF. Language Selected for LCD: Can be set to display either English, Japanese, French, or Spanish. The factory default setting is English. Original Copy Default: Copy. The factory default setting is

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Sets the default for Orig 1-Sided 1-Sided.

4-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Auto Paper/Auto Size: Selects the default from Auto Paper, Auto Size, or Manual. The factory default setting is Auto Paper. Drawer Priority: Sets the default value for paper selection. The factory default setting is Top Cassette. Special Paper: Sets the paper type for each paper feeding point (including a cassette). The factory default setting is Normal Paper. Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom: Sets whether or not to use the automatic zoom ratio when performing 2in1 or 4in1 copying. The automatic zoom ratio factory default setting is ON. Energy Save Mode: Sets the length of time before the unit automatically switches into the power saving mode when no activity has occurred. The factory setting is 5 minutes. Sleep Mode Setting: If there is no activity for a certain amount of time, the machine will enter into Sleep Mode. The waiting time can be set by the user. The factory setting is 30 minutes. The amount of power saved is greater than the Energy Save Mode; however, it takes longer to print. Touching any key on the operation panel wakes up the machine. When powering up, the panel shows "Under Processing" for a short time, and then starts working. (Loading a document during the Sleep Mode does not wake up the unit). The Sleep Mode can be disabled by changing the software switch. Refer to Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode 406) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-77. LCD Back-light Off: If there is no activity within a certain amount of time, the unit will turn off the Touch Panel backlight element. The length of time the unit waits to turn off the backlight can be set. The factory setting 1 minute.

4-2

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Auto Panel Reset: If there is no activity within a certain period of time while registering, setting, or selecting data, the Touch Panel display returns to the stand-by screen. This length of time can be set by the user. The factory setting is 1 minute. Plug-in Counter, ID Key Reset: Sets whether to reset each function when the user changes. The factory default setting is ON. 4 in 1 Copy Order: Set the page order for the 4 in 1 copying. The factory default is:

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Density Priority: Sets whether to use automatic or manual as the default density setting. The factory default settings are Auto (for density) and Text (for image). Default Copy Output Levels: Sets the default density value. The factory default setting is Normal. Printing Density: Sets the print exposure level to lighten or darken the printed output. The factory default setting is 0. Output Priority Sets the default for sorting. The factory default setting is Non-sort. Intelligent Sorting Sets whether the unit enables the intelligent sorting function according to the number of pages in the original document. The factory default setting is ON.

4-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Output Tray (option): Sets bin (the paper exit area) allocation for each copying or facsimile function. The factory default setting is as follows: When the Job Separator is installed 1st Tray 2nd Tray When the Finisher is installed 1st Tray 2nd Tray "Small" Originals: Sets whether a document can be copied if it is too small to be detected when the automatic paper selection is used. The factory default is ON. Scanner Dry: Sets the time for the automatic Scanner Dry. No Scanner Dry time is set in the factory default. Crease/Center Staple (option) Sets the place of the crease and staple when the Booklet Creation feature is selected. The factory default is 0. Priority Screen: Sets the initial display for the stand-by screen. The factory default setting is Auto-mode screen. Priority Facsimile Screen: Sets the initial value for the destination specification screen when using the facsimile function. The factory default is One-Touch screen. FAX, Port 1, Port 2 Printer, Copier FAX, Port 1, Port 2 Printer, Copier

1.

4-4

Users Choice Settings

Press [Utility].

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2.

Touch [User Set].

3.

Touch [Users Choice].

4.

Setting for Memory Recall: 1. Select [1/6], and then touch [Memory Recall].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

5.

Setting for Mixed Original Detection: 1. Select [1/6], and touch [Mixed Original Detection].

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the Mixed Original Detection default setting, then touch [Enter].

6.

Setting for Display Language: 1. Select [1/6], then touch [Language Selected for LCD].

2. Select the Language desired, then touch [Enter].

4-6

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

7.

Setting for Original Default:

Copy

1. Select [2/6], then touch [Original Copy Default]. 2. Select the document and copying method to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Section 2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig. Copy Screen) in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-39

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

8.

Setting for the Auto Paper/ Auto Size Priority: 1. Select [2/6], then touch [Auto Paper/Auto Size]. 2. Select [Auto Paper], [Auto Size], or [Manual] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Section 1.4 Selecting the Copy Paper Size for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-7, and Section 1.6 Selecting the Zoom Ratio for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-14.

9.

Setting for Drawer Priority: 1. Select [2/6] then touch [Drawer Priority].

4-8

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2. Select the paper cassette for the paper to be set as the default paper, then touch [Enter].

10. Setting for Special Paper:


1. Select [2/6], then Touch [Special Paper]. 2. Select the key for the paper cassette containing special paper, then select the special paper type. Finally, touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

If [Recycled] or [Special] is set, it is not used for facsimile reception.

4-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

11. Setting for Multiple-in-1 and


Booklet Copy Zoom: 1. Select [2/6], then touch [Multiple-in-1 and Booklet Copy Zoom]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to select the scaling factor best suited for the document and the copy paper size, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Section 2.6 Selecting the Document and Copy Format (Orig. Copy Screen) in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-39.

4 - 10

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

12. Setting for Energy Save Mode:


1. Select [3/6], then touch [Energy Save Mode]. 2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad , then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Setting the timer for the Energy Save Mode:


Times ranging from 1~240 minutes can be set.

4 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

13. Setting for Sleep Mode


Settings: 1. Select [3/6], then touch [Sleep Mode Setting]. 2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad, then touch [Enter].

4 - 12

Setting the timer for the Sleep Mode Settings:


Times ranging from 1~240 minutes can be set.

Refer to Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode 406) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-77.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

14. Setting for the LCD Backlight


OFF Function: 1. Select [3/6], then touch [LCD Back-light OFF]. 2. Enter digits using the 10-key Pad, then touch [Enter].

15. Setting Auto Panel Reset:


1. Select [3/6], then touch [Auto Panel Reset].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To change the setting:


Press <C> (clear key) and reenter. Times ranging from 1~240 minutes can be set.

If the settings for the Energy Save Mode and Sleep Mode Setting are shorter than the LCD Back-light OFF function, it turns off immediately.

4 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2. Set the length of time before Auto Panel Reset is activated, then touch [Enter].

16. Setting for Plug-In Counter, ID


key Reset: 1. Select [3/6], then touch [Plug-In Counter, ID key Reset]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value to automatically clear defaults when a user is changed, then touch [Enter].

4 - 14

i i i

To select:
When setting the time from 1 to 240 minutes, use the 10key Pad to enter digits. When [30 seconds] is touched, the reset time is set to 30 seconds.

If a timer is not needed:


Touch [No Reset].

To change the setting:


Press <C> (clear key) and re-enter.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

17. Setting for 4in1 Copy Order:


1. Select [4/6], then touch [4in1 Copy Order].

2. Select the default page order for 4in1 copying, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

18. Setting for Density Priority:


1. Select [4/6] and touch [Density Priority]. 2. Select the density setting method and image quality to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].
Refer to 1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-20, and Section 1.15 Copying Figures and Photos in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-23.

4 - 16

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

19. Setting for Default Copy


Output Levels: 1. Select [4/6], then touch [Default Copy Output Levels]. 2. Select the default density level for the automatic setting and the manual setting, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Section 1.12 Adjusting the Density for Copying in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-20.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

20. Setting for Printing Density:


1. Select [4/6], then touch [Printing Density]. 2. Select the density for printing, then touch [Enter].

21. Setting for the Output Priority:


1. Select [4/6], then touch [Output Priority].

4 - 18

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2. Select the default sorting method, then touch [Enter].

22. Setting for Intelligent Sorting:


1. Select [5/6], then touch [Intelligent Sorting]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to set the default value, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Sorting Procedure in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-26.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

23. Setting for Output Tray:


1. Select [5/6] then touch [Output Tray]. 2. Select respective output trays for facsimile, copy, and PC print sheets, then touch [Enter].

4 - 20

i i i

The [Output Tray] key is displayed only when the optional Job Separator or a Finisher is installed. Printer sets which output bin is used when the PC printer function is used. Port sorting is available only when the 2nd G3 port option is installed.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

24. Setting for Small Original:


1. Select [5/6], then touch ["Small" Originals]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] to detect small documents, then touch [Enter].

4 - 22

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

25. Setting for Scanner Dry:


1. Select [5/6], then touch [Scanner Dry]. 2. Enter digits using the 10-key pad, then touch [Enter].

26. Setting for Crease/Center:


1. Select [5/6], then touch [Crease/Center Staple].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To select:
Touch [Hours] or [Minute] and enter digits.

To change the settings:


Press <C> (Clear key) and re-enter.

The [Crease/Center Staple] key is displayed only when the optional Finisher and Saddle Unit are installed.

4 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2. Touch [Crease] or [Center Staple]. Touch [ ] [ ] to adjust the setting, and then touch [Enter].

27. Setting for Priority Screen:


1. Select [6/6], then touch [Priority Screen].

2. Touch the [Default Device Priority].

4 - 24

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

3. Select the key for the screen to be displayed first, then touch [Enter].

28. Setting for Priority FAX


Screen:

1. Select [6/6], then [Priority Screen], and then touch [Priority FAX Screen].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To select:
[FAX]: Touch this to display the FAX screen as priority. [Auto]: Touch this to display the Auto-mode screen as priority. [Copy]: Touch this to display this screen as the priority. The selected key is displayed in reverse to show it is activated.

Switching the screen:


To switch the default device Priority screen from [Auto] to [Copy] or [FAX], after setting, press the <Access> key and then press the <Panel Reset> key.

4 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Users Choice Settings (Continued)

2. Select the key for the screen to be displayed as the initial FAX screen, then touch [Enter].

29. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and


[Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen. 2.2 Transmission Settings

This section describes instructions for setting the transmission functions to be carried out by the administrator. The following items can be set: Priority Quality: Sets the default value for the Image Quality setting. The factory default is Standard. Priority Contrast: Sets the default value for the Contrast setting. The factory default is Normal.

4 - 26

i i

To select:
[One-Touch]: Touch this to make this the initial screen displayed. [Search]: Touch this to make this the initial screen displayed. [10-key Dialing]: Touch this to make this the initial screen displayed. [Index]: Touch this to make this the initial screen displayed. The selected key is displayed in reverse.

Switching the screen priority:


The screen will be switched after resetting the user selection or the automatic clearing, or after pressing <Panel Reset>.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Communication mode (when the 2nd G3 Port option is used): Sets the default value for which of the two G3 facsimile lines is tried first. The factory setting is set to try Port 1 first. Initial Status of the Transmission Mode (TX): Sets either Memory Transmission or Real-Time Transmission as the default setting. The factory setting is Memory Transmission mode. TSI Position Sets the style of the TSI information to be printed on the transmitted document. The factory setting is On the Doc. The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It is illegal to turn off this feature. TSI Selection If multiple Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) is registered, you may set the default TSI to go back to after operation. The default setting is [1] and the TSI is registered for [1]. Rotation TX You may set whether to do Rotation TX or not after an operation. The default setting is [ON]. 2-Sided TX You may set the margin layout for the 2-sided transmission. The default setting is [Auto].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmission Settings

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and then touch [TX Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Quality Mode Menu selections: 1. Select [Quality/Mode], then touch [Priority Quality].

4 - 28

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Transmission Settings (Continued)

2. Select the key for the Image Quality to be set as the initial (default) value, then touch [Enter].
Refer to Section 1.15 Copying Figures and Photos in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-23.

3. Touch [Priority Contrast].

4. Select the contrast setting for the default value, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmission Settings (Continued)

5. Touch [Communication Mode].

6. Select the G3 Port to be used as the default port.

3.

Communication Menu selections: 1. Select [Com. Menu], then touch [TX].

4 - 30

[Com. Mode] is displayed only when the optional 2nd G3 Port is installed.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Transmission Settings (Continued)

2. Select the key for the transmission mode to be set as the default value, then touch [Enter].

3. Touch [TSI].

4. Touch [TSI Position].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmission Settings (Continued)

5. Select the key for the default position of the TSI on the document, then touch [Enter].
The TSI is required on all facsimile transmissions. It is illegal to turn off this feature.

6. Touch [TSI Selection].

7. Select the TSI you want to select as default, then touch [Enter] until the display returns to the Communication Menu screen.

4 - 32

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Transmission Settings (Continued)

8. Touch [Rotation TX].

9. Select [ON] or [OFF] as default, then touch [Enter]

10. Touch [2-Sided TX].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 33

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmission Settings (Continued)

11. Select the margin layout you want to set as default.

12. Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

4 - 34

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.3

Setting the Reception Functions This section describes reception functions that are performed by the administrator. Reception Functions: Reception Mode: Sets the reception mode of the NEC IT 3520/IT2520. The factory default is Automatic Reception. Number of Rings: Sets the number of times the units telephone rings before the automatic reception function begins. The factory default is 1 ring.

1.

2.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Reception Settings

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [FAX Setting].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

Touch [RX Functions].

4 - 35

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Reception Settings (Continued)

3.

Setting the reception functions: 1. Touch [Reception Mode].

2. Select the reception mode to be set as the initial value, then touch [Enter].

4.

Set the number of rings before Automatic Reception takes place: 1. Touch [No.of RX Call Rings]. 2. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the number of times the telephone is to ring before activating the Automatic Reception function, then touch [Enter].

4 - 36

i i

To select:
[Auto] - Touch this to set the Automatic Reception mode. [Manual] - Touch this to set the Manual Reception mode.

Selections are 1~ 20 rings.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Reception Settings (Continued)

5.

Confirm the setting details when the screen returns to that shown in step 3. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

6.
2.4

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX Lock the printout of the received facsimile to printout collectively. By setting up the hours for Memory Lock, and the password-controlling printing operation, you may receive incoming faxes during the late evening in safety and security.
Before Starting Operations:
Only received fax documents can be memory locked. Copy/PC printouts cannot be locked. If you set memory lock hours, when the time comes for releasing the memory, saved documents are automatically printed. If you want to manually print, select [Print Management] on the [User Management] screen, and print. If you want to password-control the unlocking operation, register [Memory Lock Password]. If the Memory Lock Password is not yet registered, the printing operation may begin without giving password input.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To modify:
Touch the key for the items to be modified to change the setting.

4 - 37

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Collective Printing for the Received FAX

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [RX Settings]. Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Memory Lock].

3.

Select the item to modify.

4 - 38

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX

Setting the Memory Lock Hours:

1.

Touch [Memory Lock On/ Off].]

2.

Select the day of the week to set memory lock hours.

3.

Touch [Stop Time], then use the 10-key Pad to input the time when you want to start printing.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 39

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Memory Lock for the Received FAX (Continued)

4.

Touch [Start Time], then use the 10-key Pad to input the time when you want to stop printing.

4 - 40

i i i i i

Before you set the time, make sure to first set the day of the week. The time you select to start/ stop printing will be common for all days of the week selected. You may not select a different time for different days of the week. You may not set the same time for the Start and Stop printing operation. Touch [Cancel] to cancel setting. When Memory Lock is set, this icon will be displayed.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Memory Lock Password

1.

Touch [Memory Lock Password].

2.

Use the 10-key Pad to input the Memory Lock Password (four digits), then touch [Enter].

3.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To re-enter:
Touch <Clear> to clear the data field, and re-enter the information. Touch [Cancel] to go back to the state before registering any information.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.
To modify:
Touch the key to modify and reenter.

4 - 41

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Start the Printing Manually

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Touch [User Management].

3.

Touch [Print Management].

4.
i
4 - 42

Use the 10-key Pad to input the Memory Lock Password (four digits), then touch [OK].
This screen will not be displayed when the Memory Lock Password is not input.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Start the Printing Manually (Continued)

5.

Select [Lock Off], then touch [Enter].

6.

2.5

Setting for Received Documents

This function is used to set how the operator wants a document to be handled after reception. Set how to process the received fax documents. Received documents are classified by F-CODE TX, Ports and Public Document. Under these categories, you may set how to process each received documents. Type of documents: F-CODE: Sets how to process the document for each F-CODE. When an F-Coded document is received, it will be processed according to the pre-set method of reception set for each F-CODE. Port: Sets how to process documents for each port. Public document: Sets how to process the document without F-CODE. Methods of Handling a Document after Reception:
Print: Prints the document as soon as it is received. Forward: Forwards the received document to other facsimiles. Print & Forward: Prints the document and also forwards it to other facsimiles.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To stop printing:
Touch [Lock On] while printing, then touch [Enter]. After the document is printed, the lock feature is enabled.

To restart printing, then go back to Memory Lock on:


Touch [Temp. Print], then it will print the document in memory (at that time) and go back to Memory Lock on.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.
To modify:
Touch the key to modify and re-enter.

4 - 43

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Save to Box: Saves the received document into a box, that has been registered in advance for each user, without printing it.

Before Starting Operations:


The factory default setting is to print the document as soon as it is received. When the unit receives a remote copy facsimile, it prints a received document irrespective of the current setting.

Settings for Received Documents

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc Manage].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Public document].

3.

Touch [RX Doc. Settings].

4 - 44

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Settings for Received Documents (Continued)

4.

Select the document management method.

To print the received document immediately (factory default): 1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter]. To forward the received document to other facsimiles: 1. Touch [Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To select:
Select the desired method of handling a received document. The selection is displayed in reverse.

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about the destination are displayed.

To modify:
Touch the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

4 - 45

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Settings for Received Documents (Continued)

To print the received document and forward it to another facsimiles: 1. Touch [Prt&Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

To save the document in a box:

1. Touch [Save to Box], then touch [Enter].

5.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

To modify:
Touch the key for the items to be modified to change the setting.

4 - 46

i i i i

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about destination are displayed.

To modify:
Select the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

received

Printing the document:


Search document on the [Print] menu on the [Job List] screen, select it and then print.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting for Handling the Received Document by F-CODE

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc Manage].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [F-CODE].

3.

Select the key to register.

4.

Touch [F-CODE].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To cancel:
Touch [Delete].

4 - 47

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting for Handling the Received Document by F-CODE (Continued)

5.

Select the way of setting the F-CODE.

Registration of the F-CODE:

1. Touch [F-CODE]. 2. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].


Refer to Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4.

4 - 48

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> to re-enter it. Touch [Delete] to erase a character on the cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registration of the F-CODE Password:

1. Touch [F-CODE Password]. 2. Enter the F-CODE password, then touch [Enter].

Registration of the Remote Input Check:

1. Touch [Remote Input Check]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for the remote input check, then touch [Enter].

3. Touch [Enter] again.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> to reenter it. Touch [Delete] to erase a character on the cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

4 - 49

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

6.

Touch [RX Doc. Settings]. .

7.

Select the way of handling the received document.

To print the received document immediately (factory default): 1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter]. To forward the received document to another facsimiles: 1. Touch [Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

4 - 50

i i

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about the destination are displayed.

To modify:
Touch the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

(Continued)

To print the received document and forward it to another facsimiles: 1. Touch [Prt&Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

8.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

To modify:
Touch the key for the items to be modified to change the setting.

Setting for Handling the Received Document by Port

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Doc. Manage].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about destination are displayed.

To modify:
Select the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

4 - 51

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting for Handling the Received Document by Port (Continued)

2.

Touch [Port].

3.

Select the port.

4.

Touch [RX Doc. Settings].

5.

4 - 52

i i i

To use the port:


Touch [YES].

To not use the port:


Touch [NO].

The items in the Port screen (such as Port, RX Doc. Settings, Forwarding Destination) are able to be set when [YES] is selected in the Port screen.

Select the way of handling the received document.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

To print the received document immediately (factory default): 1. Touch [Print], and touch [Enter]. To forward the received document to another facsimiles: 1. Touch [Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

To print the received document and forward it to another facsimiles: 1. Touch [Prt&Forward]. 2. Select the destinations and touch [Enter].

6.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

To modify:
Touch the key for the items to be modified to change the setting.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about the destination are displayed.

To modify:
Touch the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

To select:
Touch [Add Dest.] and select the destination. When [Detail] is touched, details about destination are displayed.

To modify:
Select the key for the destination and touch [Delete].

4 - 53

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.6

Report Print Settings This section describes the various settings needed for printing reports. Report Settings Transmission Report: Sets the report giving details concerning facsimile transmission results. The factory default setting is If TX Fail (Prints a report if the transmission was unsuccessful). Activity Report: Set whether an activity report is automatically printed after every 50 communication transmissions. The factory default setting is ON.

1.

2.

4 - 54

Report Setting

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, then touch [Report Settings].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

Setting functions for printing a report: 1. Touch [TX Report].

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Report Setting (Continued)

2. Select the method of printing the activity report, then touch [Enter].

3.

Setting for the Activity Report: 1. Touch [Activity Report]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for automatic printing, then touch [Enter].

4.

Confirm the setting details when the screen returns to that shown in step 2. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

To modify:
Touch the key for the items to be modified to change the setting.

5.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To select:
You may set two types of reports, either the single destination, or the Multiple destination. [ON] - Touch this to automatically print a transmission report for every transmission. [If TX Fail] - Touch this to automatically print a transmission report only when the transmission could not be sent. [OFF] - Touch this to turn off the automatic activity report printing.

4 - 55

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.7

Confirming the Usage Status of Each Account A per-account status can be displayed concerning the number of pages printed and transmitted. Accounts can only be displayed when the accounts have been registered.
Confirming Account Status

1.

Select [Admin 1.] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Account Counter].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Select the account.

3.

4.

4 - 56

i i

To select:
Touch the key for the user or touch [Account #] and enter the desired user number.

When [All Clear] is touched, all accumulated user data is cleared.

Confirm the accumulated data and touch [Enter].

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.8

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters The meter count of the accumulated number of pages received, copied, or reports printed can be confirmed and modified by the authority of the administrator. Counter Total: The total number of pages printed, since the NEC IT 3520/IT2520 was installed, can be confirmed. Copy Total: The total number of copy pages of printed can be confirmed. Copy Size: The total number of pages printed in the specified paper size set for the size counter can be confirmed. (The installation technician will set the specified paper size.) Copy 2-Sided: The total number of 2-sided pages printed can be confirmed. Printer Total: The total number of pages of printed by the PC can be confirmed. Printer Size: The total number of pages printed by the PC in the specified paper size set in the size counter can be confirmed. (The installation technician will set the specified paper size.) Printer 2-Sided: The total number of 2-sided pages printed can be confirmed. Scan: The total number of original pages read by the scanner can be confirmed. Account Total: The total number of pages printed per registered account (only displayed when the accounts are registered, and the Account Management mode is active) can be confirmed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 57

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

FAX Print The total number of received facsimile pages printed can be confirmed and modified. Copy Print: The total number of copies printed can be confirmed and modified. Report Print: The total number of reports printed can be confirmed and modified. FAX TX: The total number of pages transmitted by facsimile can be confirmed and modified.

1.

2.

4 - 58

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

Select [Admin 1.] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Counter].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

Touch [Counter] or [Device].

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

3.

Select the item to modify.

4.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Items in the [Counter] screen cannot be modified.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter a modified count figure, then touch [Enter].
To re-enter the number:
Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> (clear key) to re-enter it. When [Cancel] is touched, it returns to the initial status.

Confirm the registered details when the display returns to the illustrated screen.
To modify:
Touch the key of the item to be modified, and re-register.

4 - 59

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming and Modifying the Page Counters

6.
2.9

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Software Switch Settings The NEC IT 3520/IT2520 is already set to various functions as default. By manipulating software switches, you may activate these functions to suit your needs. Software Switch Settings Mode Selection: Set the category of software switch settings in three digits. Bit Selection: Each mode is defined with a combination of eight binary bits (0~7), each having a pair of alternatively selectable values "0" and "1". Each bit value presents a function status. HEX Selection: Set the function status for each mode in hexadecimal number (0~9, A~F). For example, when the bit is set to "00110000", the HEX setting will be "30". The example of Bit Selection (binary number) and HEX Selection (hexadecimal number) is shown in the following table.

4 - 60

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Decimal Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Bit Selection (Binary Number)


00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100

HEX Selection (Hexadecimal Number)


00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14

....

....

252 253 254 255

11111100 11111101 11111110 11111111

FC FD FE FF

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

....

4 - 61

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Software Switch

1.

Select [Admin. 2] on the Administrator Management screen and touch [Soft SW Set].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Mode Selection], then use the 10-Key Pad to enter the mode number.

3.

Set the function by [Bit Selection] or [HEX Selection].

4 - 62

Setting by [Bit Selection]:

1. Touch [Bit Selection], then by [ ] or [ ], place the cursor on the bit you want to change. 2. Enter the [0] or [1] by the 10-Key Pad, then touch [Enter].

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Software Switch

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Setting by [HEX Selection]:

1. Touch [HEX Selection]. 2. Enter the [HEX] by the 10-Key Pad and [A] to [F], then touch [Enter]

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

4 - 63

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000)


In mode 000, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to a transmission marker and communication password. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 30)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

To have selected default to print or not to print the transmission marker. To specify print position of the transmission marker.

0 1 0

Not to print. To print. To print at both upper and lower ends of each document page. 6-17 To print at the lower end of each document page. Do not modify this bit. Not to check. To check. 6-20 _____ 6-17

5, 4 3

__________ To have selected default to check or not to check the communication password before transmission. To have selected default to check or not to check the communication password before reception. __________

11 0 1

0 1

Not to check. To check. 6-32

1, 0

00

Do not modify this bit.

_____

4 - 64

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Document Destination Insert (Mode 001)


In mode 001, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to destination insert. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 1 3 0 2 1 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 14)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 0

__________ Select to insert or not to insert the destination to the sending document.

0001 010 0 1

Do not modify this bit. Not to insert. To insert.

_____

6-6

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 65

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Report for Serial Broadcast (Mode 002)
In mode 002, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to memory clear report and TX report for serial broadcast. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 1 6 0 5 1 4 0 3 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: A8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 3

__________ To make a selection to print or not to print the memory clear report. When broadcasting, to print all TX Reports on one sheet, or to print each TX Report on separate sheets. __________

1010 0 1 0 1 00

Do not modify this bit. Not to print out. To print out. All TX Reports on one sheet.

_____ 8-26

7-1 Each TX Report on separate sheets. Do not modify this bit. _____

1, 0

4 - 66

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting of Length of Time to Hold Data after Incomplete Transmission (Mode 004)
In mode 004, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to the length of time to hold data after incomplete transmission. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 1 3 0 2 1 1 1 0 0 (HEX: 16)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 3, 2, 1, 0

__________ To set the length of time to hold data in memory after incomplete transmission.

0001 0000

Do not modify this bit. In this setting, [RE-TX START] key will not be displayed. To set data hold time to 10 minutes. To set data hold time to 20 minutes. To set data hold time to 30 minutes. To set data hold time to 40 minutes. To set data hold time to 50 minutes. To set data hold time to 60 minutes. To set data hold time to 120 minutes. To set data hold time to 240 minutes. To set data hold time to 480 minutes. Do not use any other combination of bit values.

_____

0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 Others

1-49

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 67

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting Connection onto Common Telephone Line (Mode 006)


In mode 006, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile as required for the connection to a common telephone line, with respect to the time expected for connection of communications via the line, signal transfer speed of the line, dialing system through the line, connection system to the line, and acceptability of high-speed control.

Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 0 2 0 1 1 0 0 (HEX: 32)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 1

__________ Select the PSTN port automatically. Specify how to dial standard telephone lines. (Valid only for the products using the optional 2nd G3 port.)

001 100 0

Do not modify this bit. Based on the type of operation/ registration, call from the designated line under ports 1 and 2.

_____

5-5 1 Regardless of the type of operation/ registration, call from the available line under ports 1 and 2. Do not modify this bit. _____

__________

4 - 68

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007)


In mode 007, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to reception mode for long documents in comparison with the employed print paper. An automatic mode can be selected for cutting away an exceeding document part, as it is relatively small, or for reducing the size of the received document.

Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 1 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 0 1 0 0 1 (HEX: B9)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5

Select upper limit of cut-off length after printing. When a received document is longer than the print paper and if the excess length is shorter than that specified here, it is cut off. If it is longer than the specified value set with these bits, it is split into multiple pages. This feature is enabled when the following two conditions are satisfied: When printing a received document. When bit 1 of this mode is 1.

000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

0 mm 8 mm 12 mm 14 mm 18 mm 20 mm 24 mm Not available 5-26

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 69

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007)


4, 3, 2 To provide a limit ratio to size reduction that this facsimile is permitted to make when having received a longer document that printable on any available printing paper, to render the received document printable in size so that in case of a [90%] limit the size reduction is permitted within a ratio range of 90% to 100%. (This function is available for reception printing only if bit 1of this mode is 0. The changing of these bits is not necessary unless the case in which both papers, letter and legal, are installed and a legal size document is to be printed on the legal size printing paper. In this case, a setting of [80%] limit is recommended. 000 To permit no size reduction of the received document. To provide a reduction limit of 95%. To provide a reduction limit of 90%. To provide a reduction limit of 85%. 5-26 100 To provide a reduction limit of 80%. To provide a reduction limit of 65%. To provide a reduction limit of 60%. Do not use any other combination of bit values. To perform size reduction. To perform cutaway. 5-26

001

010

011

101

110

Others

Selection to reduce in size or partially cut away a received document that is longer than printable on any available print paper. (Valid only when printing a received document.) __________

0 1

Do not modify this bit.

_____

4 - 70

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting of Dividing Print, Print Paper, Reading, and Power Saving Mode (Mode 008)
In mode 008, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to dividing print, size selection, and presence detection modes of print paper in reception printing. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

To detect the print papers. (Valid only when printing a received document.)

Print paper priority. (Determines if any paper exists in any cassette or not) 5-26 Paper cassette registered size priority. (Determined based on the paper size data set for paper cassette) Proper size paper will be selected automatically. Do not use wider width paper. 5-26 Same width only. Do not use any other combination of bit values. Do not modify this bit. _____

6, 5, 4, 3

To select the print paper for the received document. (Valid only when printing a received document.)

0000 0100 1000 Others

2, 1, 0

__________

000

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 71

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting of Display Status at Serial Broadcast Transmission (Mode 014)


In mode 014, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of the display of confirmation screen at serial broadcast transmission.

Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 (HEX: 01)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5 4, 3, 2 1, 0

_______________________ At serial broadcast transmission, select display of confirmation screen.

000 000 00 01 10 11

Do not modify these bits. A confirmation screen is not displayed. At serial broadcast transmission, a confirmation screen is displayed.

____

6-3 A confirmation screen is always displayed. Do not modify this bit.

4 - 72

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Printing Date and Time Received (Mode 016)


In mode 016, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to printing the date and time received in the mail mode/fax mode. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 40)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7 6 5, 4, 3, 2 1

_______________________ To make a selection to use the extra telephone set or not. __________ To make a selection to print or not to print the date and time received in fax mode. Specify the place of the printed date and time received in fax mode.

0 0 1 0000 0 1 0 1

Do not modify this bit. Do not use.

_____ 1-6

To use. Do not modify this bit. Not to print. To print. Print inside of document. ____ Print outside of document. ____ _____

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 73

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Non-Transmission Report (Mode 023)


In mode 023, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to selecting whether to attach the sent image to the nontransmission report. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: F8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 3

__________ To make a selection to attach or not to attach the sent image to the nontransmission report. __________

1111 0 1

Do not modify this bit. Not to attach image. To attach image.

_____

5-6

2, 1, 0

000

Do not modify this bit.

_____

4 - 74

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Receiving FAX Functions (Mode 030)


In mode 030, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to setting Rotation Print / 2in1 Reception in receiving a fax. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 1 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 (HEX: B1)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7 6, 5

__________ To make a selection to set or not to set for Rotation Print when receiving a fax.

1 00 01

Do not modify this bit. Not to set. To set (without 90-degree sorting, when receiving a remote copy).

_____

5-26 10 To set (with 90-degree sorting, when receiving a remote copy). Do not modify this bit. Not to set. To set. Do not modify this bit. 5-26 _____

11 4 To make a selection to set or not to set 2in1 Receptions in receiving fax. __________ 0 1 0001

3, 2, 1, 0

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 75

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Cassette Selection for Receiving FAX (Mode 037)


In mode 037, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to setting the options of the cassette and multipurpose manual bypass tray when receiving a fax. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: F8)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the first cassette when receiving a fax. To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the second cassette when receiving a fax. To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the third cassette when receiving a fax. (*) To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the fourth cassette when receiving a fax. (*) __________ To make a selection to permit or not to permit the selection of the multi-purpose manual bypass tray when receiving a fax. __________

0 1

Not to permit. (*1) To permit. 5-26

0 1

Not to permit. (*1) To permit. 5-26

0 1

Not to permit. (*1) To permit. 5-26

0 1

Not to permit. (*1) To permit. 5-26

3 2

1 0 1

Do not modify this bit. Not to permit. (*1) To permit.

_____

5-26

1, 0

00

Do not modify this bit.

_____

(*) Valid only when the optional print paper cassettes are installed. (*1) Do not set bits 7, 6, 5, 4, and 2 all to logic 0.

4 - 76

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting of the Time for Auto Power Source Off (Mode 406)
In mode 406, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to the Auto Power Source Off time. Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 0 (HEX: 1E)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6, 5, 4 3, 2, 1, 0

Select Auto Power Source Off time

00000000 00000001 00001111 00011110 00111100 11110000 Others

Power source never off. Off after 1 minute Off after 15 minutes Off after 30 minutes

_____

4-12 Off after 60 minutes Off after 240 minutes Not available

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 77

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Auto-reset After Copying by the Automatic Document Feeder (Mode 429)
In mode 429, the software switch permits the user to determine the function status of this facsimile with respect to setting the auto-reset after copying by the Automatic Document Feeder.

Factory Setting Bit Number Bit Value 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 (HEX: 00)

Associated Functions and Selectable Statuses In the column of bit value, each shaded portion represents a factory-set function status. In the far right column is given the page number of a related description.
Bit No. Associated Functions Bit Value Selectable Statuses Ref. Page

7, 6 5

__________ To make a selection to set or not to set the auto-reset after copying by the automatic document feeder. __________

00 0 1

Do not modify this bit. Not to set. To set.

_____

_____

4, 3, 2, 1, 0

00000

Do not modify this bit.

_____

4 - 78

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 3

ADVANCED REGISTRATION
The following section describes the procedures for registering more advanced features and items into the NEC IT 3520/IT2520.

3.1

Establishing a Bulletin Board A bulletin board needs to be established before a document can be registered on it.
Items to be registered:
Bulletin Board Number: Select the bulletin board number (1 to 10) to register. Up to 10 bulletin boards can be created. F-CODE: Register a F-CODE to use the bulletin board functions for each board. Up to 20 characters can be registered using numbers 0~9, , and #. F-CODE Password:

A password can be registered to download a document from a bulletin board. The password can be set for each board. Up to 20 characters can be registered using numbers 0~9, , and #. Name:

Register a name for a bulletin board according to its number. Up to 16 characters can be registered. Remote Input Check: Sets whether or not a password is required to register a document on a bulletin board. The factory default setting is Remote Input Check ON. Remote Output Check: Sets whether or not a password is required to download a document from a bulletin board. The factory default setting is Remote Output Check OFF.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 79

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Establishing a Bulletin Board

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Select [User Set], then touch [Fax Input].

3.

Touch <Bultn. Board>.

4.

Select a bulletin board number.

4 - 80

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Establishing a Bulletin Board (Continued)

5.

Register the items required for the bulletin board:

Register the F-CODE:

1. Touch [F-CODE].

2. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Make sure not to duplicate the F-CODEs for the bulletin board and the mailbox! To re-enter the number:
Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> to reenter it. When the [Delete] key is touched, the character on the cursor is deleted. When the [Cancel] key is touched, the display returns to the initial status.

Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

4 - 81

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the F-CODE Password:

1. Touch [F-CODE Password]. 2. Enter the F-CODE Password, then touch [Enter].

Registering the Name:

1. Touch [Name]. 2. Enter the name, then touch [Enter].


Refer to Section 1.8 Entering Characters for Registration in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-5.

4 - 82

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> to reenter it. When the [Delete] key is touched, the character on the cursor is deleted. When the [Cancel] key is touched, the display returns to the initial status.

Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-22.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting the Remote Input Check:

1. Touch [Remote Input Check]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF], then touch [Enter].

Setting the Remote Output Check:

1. Touch [Remote Output Check]. 2. Select [ON] or [OFF], then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 83

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

6.

Confirm the registered details once the display has returned. Touch [Enter] if the entries are correct.

7.
i

To establish another bulletin board, repeat from step 3 above.

3.2

Registering Copy Programs Frequently used copy functions can be registered in advance and executed at the touch of a single key. This speeds up routine copy jobs and helps to increase office productivity.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to 10 copy programs can be registered. The following functions can be registered in combination with each other in the copy programs. Number of Copies Copy Paper Size Zoom Density Sort Mixed Original Detection Cover Sheets Page Insertion OHP Interleaving File Margins Edge/Frame Erase Image Repeating Image Settings Separate Scanning Black/White Reverse

For additional details on copying using the program keys, refer to Section 2.19 Using Copy Programs in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-76.

Registering Copy Programs

1. 2.
4 - 84

To modify:
Touch the key for the item to be modified, and re-register it.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Set the copy function to be registered. Press <Mode Check>.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering Copy Programs (Continued)

3.

Touch [Job Mem Input].

4.

5. 6.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i i

There are four types of Confirmation screens:


When [Next] is touched, the screen changes to the next one. When [Back] is touched, it returns to the previous screen.

Touch [Input], then touch the key to register the program.


Keys marked with this symbol have not yet been programmed. If a new program is registered in a key that was previously registered, the old program is deleted. To confirm the registered details:
Touch the key that has already been registered after touching [Check].

To delete registration:
Touch the key that is already registered and touch [Delete].

Touch [Check], then touch the programmed key. Confirm the registered details. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.
There are two type of confirmation screens. When [Next] is touched, the screen changes to the second one. When [Back] is touched on the second screen, it returns to the first screen.

4 - 85

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering Copy Programs (Continued)

7.
3.3

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Registering the Confidential Box In order to save documents in the confidential box, you need to register the confidential box in advance. Confidential Box Name: Register the name for the confidential box. A maximum four double-byte characters (eight single-byte characters, mixed usage of double and single bytes are acceptable) can be registered. F-CODE: Register the F-CODE with which to identify the twenty digits composed of numbers and symbols 0 to 9, *, and # that can be registered. F-CODE Password: Register the pass word for the confidential box. Twenty digits composed of numbers and symbols 0 to 9, *, and # that can be registered. Remote Input Check: Set whether or not to have password control when receiving documents to the confidential box from other fax machines. The default setting is [Remote Input Check Off].

4 - 86

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Confidential Box

1. 2.

Press [Utility]. Touch [User Set].

3.

Touch [FAX Input].

4.

Touch [Conf. Box].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

4 - 87

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Confidential Box

5.

Select the confidential box.

6.

Setting for the Confidential Box.


1. Registering the Confidential Box Name: a. Touch [Confidential Box Name].

b. Enter the confidential box name, then touch [Enter].

4 - 88

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering the Confidential Box


2. Registering the F-CODE: a. Touch [F-CODE]. b. Enter the F-CODE, then touch [Enter].

3. Registering the F-CODE Password: a. Touch [F-CODE Password]. b. Enter the F-CODE password, then touch [Enter].

4. Registering the Remote Input Check: a. Touch [Remote Input Check]. b. Select [ON] or [OFF] for remote input check, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ], to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> (Clear key) to re-enter it. Touch [Delete] to erase a character on the cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] or [ ], to move the cursor and re-enter the number, or press <C> (Clear key) to re-enter it. Touch [Delete] to erase a character on the cursor. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the procedure.

4 - 89

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering the Confidential Box

7.

Confirm the registration details after the display returns to the screen shown in step 6. Touch [Enter] if they are correct.

8.

4 - 90

i i

To modify:
Touch the key to modify and re-enter.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.
To register another Confidential Box, repeat from step 5 above.

Advanced Registration and Setting Operations

Chapter 5

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

SECTION 1

GENERAL INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes how to operate the unit as a facsimile. First, the basic operation items are described, in order to get the user familiar with sending facsimiles, the various dialing methods used to send facsimiles, as well as setting the image quality and contrast. In Chapter 6, more advanced operational features are covered. Items such as Serial Broadcasting, 2-Sided Transmissions, Timer Transmission, and 2in1 Transmission are among the advanced features described.

SECTION 2

BASIC SENDING OPERATIONS


This section describes the basic operations needed to send and receive a facsimile document.

2.1

Quick Memory Transmission When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 scans the first page of a document, it immediately begins dialing the destination number. The IT3520/IT2520 continues to scan the remaining pages, while it sends whatever has been stored in memory. Many other facsimile machines do not begin sending until all the document pages have been scanned and stored.
Before Starting Operations:

Telephone line type: Register the Self-Telephone Number and select the telephone line type for your line. Refer to Setting the Line Type in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-18. Using the Auto-mode Screen: Transmission is possible using this screen just by entering a number with four digits or more (three digits for the IT2520), or a number starting with 0 (facsimile numbers). Refer to Section 3.3 Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-15.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

5-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using the FAX Screen: Transmission is possible directly from this screen. Refer to Section 3.3 Stand-by Screen (Initial Screen) in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-15. Using the Copy Screen: Press <Fax/Mail/Scan> before transmission.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5-2

Transmitting when Using the Automatic Document Feeder

Load the document into the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Touch [10-key Dialing].

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Transmitting when Using the Automatic Document Feeder (Continued)

5.

Press <Start>. Transmission will now begin.


Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-36.

Transmitting Using the Book Scanner

1.

2. 3.

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

To quit sending:
Press <Stop>, then select the action to suspend.

When memory is full:


Try transmitting again after waiting for memory to be freed.

Open the Document Cover to place the document on the glass surface.
Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Close the Document Cover. Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Touch [10-key Dialing].

5-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmitting Using the Book Scanner (Continued)

5.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number of the destination.

6.

Press <Start>. The Scanning screen will be displayed.

7.

8.

5-4

i i i

When the memory is full:


Try transmitting again after waiting for memory to be freed.

Touch [Scan End] after all pages have been stored into memory.
When scanning multiple documents:
Place the next document on the glass surface and press <Start> while the screen indicates [Restart Scan] to continue with scanning.

Press <Start>. Transmission will now begin.


To suspend transmission:
Press <Stop>, then select the action to be suspended. Refer to Section 6 Quitting an Operation in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-36.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.2

Calling the Destination and Transmitting the Document Using the Automatic Document Feeder: The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will begin dialing and sending the document as soon as the first page is stored into memory. If the unit is transmitting a previously stored document, or if the unit is currently receiving a document, it will store your document into memory, until the previous action is finished. Using the Book Scanner: Press <Start> after scanning all the pages of the document. As soon as the <Start> key is pressed, dialing will begin. Up to 200 documents can be stored in memory. If 200 documents have already been stored, or if memory is full, no more pages can be stored.

2.3

Selecting the Communications Mode (For optional 2nd G3 Port only)

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

The communication mode is selected to send the document via a specific facsimile port. [G3-1] [G3-2] Select this port to send via G3 Port 1. Select this port to send via G3 Port 2.

The communications mode returns to the default setting after each transmission. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1. Also, refer to Setting Connection onto Common Telephone Line (Mode 006) on page 4-68.

5-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.4

Using Full Dialing for International Destinations If the country code and the destinations facsimile number are entered after the international code, a busy signal (or "fast busy") may be heard, and dialing may be impossible. In this case, it may be necessary to enter a pause to allow proper dialing timing to occur. It is recommended that <Pause> be pressed twice to enter a six-second pause after the international code. After this, the rest of the number may be dialed as normal.

2.5

When Transmission is Unsuccessful A Non-transmission Report is printed whenever a document cannot be sent. The report contains part of the first page image of the unsuccessful document, as well as details about the attempted transmission. Refer to Setting the Non-Transmission Report (Mode 023) on page 4-74.

5-6

If a document could not be transmitted, it can be resent (maximum of 20 documents). To re-send, touch [Job List] and then touch [Com.] to identify the unsuccessful document.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

If either the [Re-TX] key or the [Dest. Chng] key is displayed on the Touch Panel, re-transmission is possible without the need of rescanning. To send to the same destination, touch [Re-TX]. To send to a different destination, touch [Dest. Chng].

2.6

Using One-Touch Dialing If the destinations facsimile number is registered in advance, the desired number can be selected by just pressing the appropriate One-Touch key.
Before Starting Operations:
The destinations number must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30. If One-Touch keys are categorized into branch offices, regions such as the United States and International, or as customers/clients, etc., it is easier to keep track by entering the One-Touch keys into Index keys. Refer to Section 2.13 Registering an Index for One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-39. Each One-Touch key has a One-Touch Number. A destination is selected by inputting the One-Touch Number (000~539) instead of pressing the One-Touch key. One-Touch Numbers are allocated with an index as shown:

1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

(Index 1)

(Index 36)

Using One-Touch Numbers

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

5-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using One-Touch Numbers (Continued)

2.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Press <#>.

4.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the One-Touch number.

5.

5-8

The One-Touch key which the One-Touch number is entered will be displayed in reverse.

Press <Start>.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Using One-Touch Numbers (Continued)

6.

Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc. Transmission now begins.

Using One-Touch Keys

1. 2.

3.

4.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Touch the One-Touch key for the desired destination.


Using Index Keys:
The first index screen is automatically displayed. Touch the index tabs, [Index List], or [ ] [ ] to find the desired key.

To select multiple destinations:


Touch all the keys needed. The selected keys are displayed in reverse.

To correct an entry:
An entry can be cancelled by touching the key again. The desired key can then be selected.

Press <Start>.

5-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using One-Touch Keys (Continued)

5.

Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc. Transmission now begins.

2.7

Searching the Destination by Name The destination can be searched alphabetically by the names registered in the One-Touch Keys.
Before Starting Operations:
The destinations number must be registered in advance. Refer to 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30.

Searching the Destination by Name

1. 2.

5 - 10

Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Searching the Destination by Name

3.

Touch [Search].

4.

Touch [Search].

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Searching can be done using [ ] [ ]. Keys with frames are FAX Program keys.

Input the spelling of the destination being searched, and touch [Enter].

5 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Searching the Destination by Name

6.

Confirm and touch the destination, and press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

2.8

Using Program Dialing Keys Various functions can be registered as program keys for convenience and efficient operations. Items such as Serial Broadcasting, Timer Transmission, and 2in1 Transmission can all be registered in advance, and the operation is then as simple as touching a single key.
Before Starting Operations:
The functions and destination information must be registered in advance. Up to 30 keys can be registered as Program Dialing keys. The total number of One-Touch keys and Program Dialing keys cannot exceed 540. For more information, refer to Section 2.14 Registering Program Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-41.

Using Program Dialing Keys

1.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

5 - 12

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Using Program Dialing Keys (Continued)

2.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch the Program Dialing key to be used.

4.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Program Dial keys are those with borders. Using Index Keys:
The first index screen is automatically displayed. Touch the index tabs, [Index List], or [ ] [ ] to find the desired key.

Confirm the details and press <Start>.

Touch [Enter] after confirming the destination and the document number, etc. Transmission now begins.
Transmission begins even if [Enter] is not touched.

5 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.9

Sending Fine Print and Photos Selecting the appropriate image quality for documents containing fine print, detailed drawings, and photographs will ensure that the document is sent clearly.

Setting Image Quality

1. 2.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4.

Touch [Quality] and select the image quality setting.

5 - 14

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Setting Image Quality (Continued)

5. 6.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Normal sized characters (handwriting, typed, etc.) Fine print (newspapers, magazines, reports, etc.) or detailed drawings Photos and text mixed Photos

If the destinations facsimile does not support Super Fine, Super GSR, or Text+Photo, then the document is sent in either Fine or GSR automatically. When GSR, Super GSR, or Text+Photo is selected the image quality may deteriorate depending on the quality and the paper size of the destinations facsimile. Transmission of a document containing photos may produce stripes across the photo, depending on the original photograph. If the stripes are too distinctive, select either GSR or Super GSR when sending the document.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Settings for image quality return to the default value after each transmission. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

Document Type

Image Quality Setting

[Standard] [Fine] [Super Fine] [Text + Photo] [GSR] [Super GSR]

5 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.10

Adjusting Contrast The image contrast can be adjusted to suit the darkness of characters and paper used when sending a document. For example, if the characters are printed on colored paper, the contrast can be adjusted to compensate for the colored paper.

Adjusting Contrast

1. 2.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4.

Touch [Contrast].

5 - 16

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Adjusting Contrast (Continued)

5.

Select the desired contrast setting.

6. 7.

2.11

Sending Documents without Reduction Normally, a document is automatically reduced to fit the paper size of the recipients facsimile. If automatic size reduction is not desired, or if the document must be sent in its original size, the Nonreduction mode is available.

Nonreduction Mode

1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Adjusting the contrast level:


Five levels are available. The transmitted document gets lighter each time [Lighter] is touched (use this for dark colored paper). The level gets darker each time [Darker] is touched (use this for faint or colored characters).

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.


The contrast selection automatically returns to the default value after each transmission.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

5 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Nonreduction Mode (Continued)

2.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4.

Touch [Reduction/Area].

5.

Touch [Reduction].

5 - 18

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Nonreduction Mode (Continued)

6.

Touch [No Reduction], then touch [Enter].

7. 8.

2.12

Selecting the Scan Area The area of the document to be scanned can be specified. Part of a large document can be sent, or irregular-sized documents can be sent.

Selecting the Scan Area

1.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Setting:
When [Auto Size] is selected, the unit automatically adjusts the size of the document to that of the recipient. When [No Reduction] is selected, the document is sent in its original size regardless of the recipients paper size.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.


The size reduction setting returns to [Auto Size] after each transmission.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

5 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Selecting the Scan Area (Continued)

2.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch [Quality&Reduction].

4.

Touch [Reduction/Area].

5.

Touch [Scan Area].

5 - 20

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Selecting the Scan Area (Continued)

6.

Select the area to be scanned and touch [Enter].

7. 8.

Confirming the Scanning Area: The area scanned by the book scanner should be checked against the mark on the periphery of the glass surface. For example, when Letter (8 1/2"x11") is selected, the part of the document shown is sent.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Selecting the area:


Touch a key to adjust the size and direction of the area of the document to be scanned. When [Auto Detect.] is touched, the scanned area that most closely matches the document size is automatically set.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.


The setting for the scanned area returns to [Auto Detect.] after each transmission.

5 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.13

Using Chain Dialing Multiple One-Touch keys can be combined together to allow dialing of authorization codes, extensions, PINs, etc., that may exceed the digit length of a single One-Touch key.
Before Starting Operations:
Chain Dialing is possible by using the 10-key Pad, in combination with a One-Touch key. Numbers up to 192 digits long can be dialed when chain dialing is used. Numbers up to 40 digits long are displayed on the touch panel screen.

Using Chain Dialing

1. 2.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Touch [Chain Dial].

5 - 22

When [Chain Dial] is touched, [Chain Dial] key is highlighted and this icon is displayed.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Using Chain Dialing (Continued)

4.

Select the destination. Using One-touch keys: 1. Touch the One-Touch key.
Refer to Section 2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing on page 5-7.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

When a One-Touch key is touched:


This icon is displayed

To confirm the number:


When the cursor is moved to the icon, after [10-key Dialing] is touched, the number is displayed that is registered in the One-Touch key. Use [ ] [ ] to move the cursor.

To continue the number:


Touch a One-Touch key to select the next part of the Chain Dial.

5 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using Chain Dialing (Continued)

5.

Select a destination. Using the 10-key Pad: 1. Touch [10-key Dialing] and use the 10-key Pad to enter the destinations number.
Refer to Section 2.1 Quick Memory Transmission on page 5-1.

6.
SECTION 3

Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

BASIC RECEIVING OPERATIONS


When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 is in Automatic Reception mode, documents will be received without any user intervention. Manual Reception mode is also available. This section describes the receiving procedure concerning paper sizes and how the unit handles an out-of-paper condition.

3.1

Changing the Reception Mode There are two methods to receive a facsimile: Automatic Reception: The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will automatically answer the incoming call and receive the facsimile without any action from the user.

5 - 24

To re-enter the number:


Use [ ] [ ] to move the cursor and re-enter individual digits, or press <C> and reenter the entire number, When [Delete] is touched, the character above the cursor is deleted.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Manual Reception: When an extra telephone set is connected to the unit, manual reception is available. The user must pick up the telephone handset, press <Start>, and hang up the handset in order to receive a facsimile. This mode is mainly used if the user location only has a single telephone line, and that line is used for both voice calls and facsimile calls.
Refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43.

3.2

While Receiving a Document The touch panel displays a receiving icon:

3.3

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

When reception is complete, a beep is heard.

When the Recording Paper Runs Out The touch panel displays an alarm icon indicating the lack of paper.

No Paper Icon

When paper runs out, the paper level indication turns red to alert the user. The received document(s) is stored in memory. Once the paper supply is replenished, any stored documents will automatically be printed. If memory becomes full, no further document data can be stored.

5 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

3.4

Paper Sizes and Document Formats The received document sizes can be: Ledger (11" by 17") Legal (8 1/2" by 14") Letter (Portrait - 8 1/2" by 11") Letter (Wide - 11" by 8 1/2")

3.5

When Receiving Long Documents When a document is received that is longer than the normal paper sizes, the document image is reduced as shown below. In this case, the optimal reduction ratio is automatically selected to fit the image onto the print paper.

5 - 26

   

If the recording paper installed is not the same size as that of the receiving facsimile, the document is either printed on the next larger size paper (if installed), or the facsimile is reduced to fit on the available paper size. For example, if a ledger-sized document is received and the IT3520/ IT2520 has only letter-sized paper installed, the document is reduced and printed on the letter-sized paper. Refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43. When letter-sized documents are received, the page is rotated by 90o and will be printed, even though the documents were inserted (at the source-end) in a different direction than the print paper (Rotation Print). A received document cannot be printed on paper inserted in the Multipurpose Manual Bypass Tray. Refer to Setting the Cassette Selection for Receiving FAX (Mode 037) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-76. Refer to Setting of Dividing Print, Print Paper, Reading, and Power Saving Mode (Mode 008) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-71, and Setting the Receiving FAX Functions (Mode 030) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-75.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

If the received document is too long to be printed on the installed print paper (even to the maximum reduction amount of 60%), the image is divided and printed on multiple pages. In this case, the transition area (the area where the image is divided) is printed on both pages. The maximum reduction ratio can be set. The "Cut Off" mode is also available, in which case the excess area is ignored when printed. For more details, refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43, and Setting of Reception Mode for Long Documents (Mode 007) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-69.

3.6

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 can be used to make voice calls in addition to facsimiles. This section describes the method of using a telephone connected to the unit.
Before Starting Operations:
An external telephone (not provided) must be connected to the jack marked TEL on the back of the unit.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Making and Receiving Telephone Calls

5 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Making a Call:

1.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Pick up the handset.

Making an On-hook Call:

1. 2.

3.

5 - 28

i i

Make sure that a dial tone is heard from the handset.

Dial the number from the telephone. Use the handset in the same manner as a regular telephone. Hang up the handset when the call is complete.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. With the handset in place, touch [On-hook Dial].


Make sure that a dial tone is heard from the unit.

Select the destination number.

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Making an On-hook Call: (Continued)

4. 5. 1. 2. 3.

When you hear the call being answered, touch [On-hook Dial] to take the unit off hook. Hang up the handset when the call is complete.

Receiving a Call:

Lift up the handset when a ringer is heard.


Refer to Section 2.5 Setting for Received Documents in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-43.

If a facsimile tone is heard, press <Start> and hang up the handset. The facsimile will be now be received. If a voice call was received, hang up the handset when the call is completed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

5 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5 - 30

Basic Sending and Receiving Operations

Chapter 6

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter describes the various operational procedures for advanced receiving and transmitting features of the NEC IT3520/IT2520. Items such as Serial Broadcasting, Timer Transmission, and 2in1 Transmission along with many others, will be explained in detail.

SECTION 2

ADVANCED TRANSMISSION OPERATIONS

2.1

Serial Broadcast Transmission Serial Broadcasting allows transmission of a document to multiple destinations. The document is stored in memory, then the IT3520/IT2520 can sequentially send the document to up to 300 destinations.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to 300 destinations can be selected for each transmission. However, only up to twelve can be specified when using the 10-key Pad for dialing the destination.

Using One-Touch Dialing:


Facsimile numbers must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30. More than one number can be registered in a Program key. Refer to Section 2.14 Registering Program Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-41.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Serial Broadcast Transmission

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Touch <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select all the destinations to which the document is to be sent.

Selecting with One-Touch Keys:

1. On the One-Touch screen(s), select all the destinations required.


Refer to Section 2.6 Using One-Touch Dialing in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-7.

Selecting with the 10-key Pad:

1. Enter the destinations facsimile number using the 10-key Pad. 2. To add another location, touch [Add Dest.]. 3. Enter the next number. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all locations have been entered.

6-2

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Selecting with a Program Key:

1. Touch the required Program key(s) on the touch panel.


Refer to Section 2.8 Using Program Dialing Keys in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-12.

4. 5.

Press <Start>. Confirm the destinations and touch [Enter].

6.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

If the destination is selected via a Program key, this screen will not appear.

Confirm the number of destinations and the facsimile number, then press <Start>. Transmission now begins.
The mode check screen can be selected to be displayed or not, by setting the software switch. Refer to Setting of Display Status at Serial Broadcast Transmission (Mode 014) on page 4-72.

6-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Status of the Serial Broadcast Transmission The Serial Broadcast Report presents a detailed status report of all aspects of the transmission.

6-4

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.2

Printing TSI Information The Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) helps the recipient identify the sender, as well as provide the date, time, and page numbers of the transmission. Multiple TSI can be registered. An internal fax can be sent in the name of the department or division, while an external fax can be sent in the company name.
Before Starting Operations:
The date, time, and sending stations name must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.6 Registering the Transmitter Subscribers Identification (TSI) in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-19, and Section 1.7 Required Initial Registration/Settings and Confirmation in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-4. A maximum of eight TSI can be registered.

Individual User TSI

Standard TSI

Setting the TSI

1. 2.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the TSI (Continued)

3.

Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TSI].

4.

Select the TSI, then touch [Enter].

5. 6.
2.3

Destination Insertion When a document is transmitted, the recipients name can be printed along with the TSI. The recipient can easily confirm to whom the document is addressed.
Before Starting Operations:
This function prints a recipient name as it is registered in a One-Touch key. The recipients information must be registered in advance as a One-Touch key. The recipients name cannot be inserted when using 10-key dialing, or when the Chain Dialing feature is used. The name of each recipient is printed on documents when using Serial Broadcast Transmission. The setting is reset after each transmission. Refer to Setting the Document Destination Insert (Mode 001) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-65.

6-6

To cancel:
Touch cancel.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Destination Insert

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Dest. Insert].

4. 5.
2.4

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Printing the Transmission Report A Transmission Report can be set to print after every transmission, print only when a transmission failed, or not to print.

Printing the Transmission Report

1. 2.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Printing the Transmission Report (Continued)

3.

Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TX Report].

4.

Select the printout condition of the Transmission Report, then touch [Enter].

5. 6.

6-8

How to select:
[Default]: Transmission Report will be printed in a preset manner. Refer to Step 7. [ON]: Transmission Report will be printed after every fax sent. [If TX Fail]: Transmission Report will be printed only if a fax could not be sent. [OFF]: Transmission Report will not be printed whether a fax is successful or not.

Select the destination. Press [Start]. Transmission now begins.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Printing the Transmission Report (Continued)

7.

After the transmission, the report is printed.

2.5

2 in 1 Transmission The 2 in 1 Transmission feature allows the user to send two consecutive letter-sized pages as a single page. The two pages are reduced before sending, and will be received and printed as one letter-sized page. This feature is convenient for saving telephone line charges (only one page is being sent), as well as saving consumables on the recipients end (i.e. less toner and paper are used).
Before Starting Operations:
Only the Automatic Document Feeder can be used to scan documents for the 2 in 1 feature. Only letter-sized documents can be used. The letter paper must be inserted into the ADF in the portrait direction. The 2 in 1 Transmission feature is reset after each transmission.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2 in 1 Transmission

1.

Load the document in the ADF in the portrait direction.

2. 3.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], and touch [2 in 1].

4. 5.
2.6

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

2-Sided Transmission This feature allows a two-sided page to be scanned and transmitted.
Before Starting Operations:
Any document sent by using this feature can only be printed on one side of the paper at the recipients end. Real-Time Transmission, 2in1 Transmission, and using the TX Marker cannot be used with this feature.

6 - 10

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2-Sided Transmission

1. 2.

Load the document in the ADF with the front side face up.
Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

3.

Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [2-Sided TX].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2-Sided Transmission (Continued)

4.

Select the margin of the document, then touch [Enter]. Setting the document margin: 1. Select the document margin (standard or top). 2. Touch either [Standard Book] or [Top Margin], according to the way the document is laid out. 3. To automatically set the margin, touch [Auto]. Touch [Cancel] to cancel the setting. Setting the document direction: 1. Touch [Document Direction]. 2. Select the document direction, then touch [Enter].

6 - 12

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2-Sided Transmission (Continued)

5. 6.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.7

Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Document When the longer side of the letter-sized paper (8.5"x11") is inserted into the document feeder, the document is treated as an 11"x17" sized document in the recipients facsimile machine. If the recipient fax machine uses lettersized paper, the document will be reduced. However, if you set Rotation Transmission, the machine will be able to transmit the letter-sized document in its original size, regardless of the document insertion direction.
Before Starting Operations:
The rotation Transmission function is only applicable to letter-sized documents. Rotation Transmission cannot be set at the same time with Real-Time Transmission and 2 in 1 Transmission.

Rotation Transmission of Letter-sized Documents

1.

Load the document with the longer side inserted into the document feeder.
Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

2. 3.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Set 1] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Rotation TX].

4. 5.

6 - 14

[Rotation TX] will be highlighted.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Scanning now begins.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.8

Priority Transmission This feature allows an urgent document to be transmitted with top priority. If a serial broadcast is in progress, the urgent document can be stored into memory and will be sent as soon as the job in progress is finished. The urgent document is then transmitted and the serial broadcast then resumes where it was interrupted.
Before Starting Operations:
Only one recipient can be specified for this feature. The Timer Transmission feature cannot be used with this feature.

Priority Transmission

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Priority TX].

4. 5.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. The document will be now be scanned.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

2.9

Timer Transmission The Timer Transmission feature allows a scanned document to be sent at a specific time. This can save on long-distance and international call charges by timing the transmissions after telephone rates are discounted.
Before Starting Operations:
Use the 24-hour clock to set the time. The time must be set accurately in order for the document to be sent at the correct time. The timer setting is reset after each transmission. Up to 200 documents can be stored for Timer Transmission. Real-Time Transmission and Priority Transmission features cannot be performed in combination with a Timer Transmission.

Timer Transmission

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Timer Set].

6 - 16

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Timer Transmission (Continued)

4.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the desired transmission time, then touch [Enter].

5. 6.
2.10

Using the TX Marker The TX Marker feature stamps a small red mark at either the bottom, or the top and bottom of each scanned page. This confirms to the user that a page was successfully scanned into memory.
Before Starting Operations:
An optional TX Marker Stamp Unit is required for this function. Replace the spare TX Marker when the print becomes too light. Refer to Section 9.3 Installing and Replacing the Spare Transmission (TX) Marker Stamp in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-65. The TX Marker cannot be used with the copy features. Only the ADF can be used for the TX Marker feature. When using the book scanner the TX Marker will not be stamped on the page. Refer to Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-64.

Using the TX Marker

1. 2.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Setting the time:


Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and use the 10-key Pad to enter the time. The numbers can be cleared by pressing <C>. Enter 00:00 for 24:00.

To Cancel:
Touch [Cancel] to cancel.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. The document is stored into memory and will be sent at the specified time.

Load the document in the ADF.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

6 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using the TX Marker (Continued)

3.

Select [Set 2] from [FAX Menu], then touch [TX Marker].

4.

Select the desired stamping position, then touch [Enter].

5. 6.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

TX Marker Conditions: When either the Real-Time Transmission or Manual Transmission function is selected, a marker will stamp only on pages successfully transmitted. When Quick Memory Transmission is selected, a marker is printed showing that the document pages have successfully been scanned into memory. In this case, refer to the Activity List or the Transmission Report to verify that the transmission was successful.

6 - 18

The TX Marker setting returns to the default status after each transmission.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Position of the TX Marker: The TX Marker can be set to stamp the bottom of a page, or the top and bottom of a page. Refer to Figure 6-1 TX Marker Position. Refer to Section 2.1 Changing the Initial Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-1.

2.11

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Figure 6-1 TX Marker Position

Real-Time Transmission The Real-Time Transmission feature allows sending documents page-bypage, without first storing them into memory.
Before Starting Operations:
The ADF is the only scanning method available with this feature. Real-Time Transmission cannot be used while another document is being sent or received. The feature can only be used for a single transmission at a time. The Timer Transmission feature cannot be used with Real-Time Transmission.

Real-Time Transmission

1. 2.

Load the document in the Automatic Document Feeder.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

6 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Real-Time Transmission (Continued)

3.

Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Real-Time].

4. 5.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

2.12

Password Transmission Password Transmission is used to make certain that important documents can only be sent to the proper recipient station. A 2-digit password is registered is registered in both the sending and receiving facsimile units. If the passwords match, the document is sent successfully; however, if the passwords do not match on both sides, the communication fails.
Before Starting Operations:
The same password must be registered at both sending and receiving sides. Refer to Section 2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-28. This feature may not work on all manufacturers units installed at the receiving end. Refer to Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-64.

6 - 20

The NEC IT3520/IT2520 will return to the initial sending status after each transmission.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Password Transmission

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Password TX].

4. 5.
2.13

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Remote Copying The Remote Copying function allows the sender to specify how many copies of the transmitted document are to be printed at the receiving end.
Before Starting Operations:
Up to 99 copies can be specified. This function is only available if the receiving facsimile has the Remote Copying function using F-CODE, otherwise the transmission will fail. The Remote Copying setting is reset after each transmission.

Remote Copying

1.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Remote Copying (Continued)

2. 3.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [FAX] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Remote Copy].

4.

Use the 10-key Pad to enter the number of copies to be printed at the remote side, then touch [Enter].

5. 6.
2.14

F-CODE The F-CODE provides a facsimile communication function using codes such as Sub-Address (SUB), Selective Polling (SEP), and Password (PWD) as defined in the G3 standard of the International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T). The F-CODE enables confidential transmission and bulletin board communications between facsimiles that support the F-CODE. The 10-key Pad digits and symbols are used to specify the F-CODE. SUB: Specified when transmitting using an F-CODE.

6 - 22

i i

Specify up to 99 copies. The numbers can be cleared by pressing <C>.

Select the destination. Press <Start>. Transmission now begins.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SEP: Specified to retrieve a document stored on a facsimile at the transmitting side by calling that facsimile (Receive Polling). SID/PWD: Specified when the called facsimile is password protected.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Before Starting Operations:


When an F-CODE is entered using the number keys, F-CODE transmission can only be used for one recipient per transmission. Note that F-CODE cannot be specified for individual recipients when documents are transmitted to multiple recipients simultaneously (Serial Broadcast Transmission). When an F-CODE is registered in a One-Touch key, F-CODE transmission to individual recipients is possible.

Confidential F-CODE Transmission: Individual mailboxes are created in the IT3520/IT2520 by registering individual F-CODEs for each user. A password is required to download the received document, so confidential communications can be sent between facsimiles.

6 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Procedure for Confidential F-CODE Transmission

1.

Select [F-CODE], then touch [F-CODE (SUB)] when facsimile transmission is used.

Bulletin Boards: Documents can be disclosed to anyone who wants to access them by using an F-CODE to establish a Bulletin Board. Documents on a bulletin board can be downloaded to your facsimile by inputting the F-CODE registered for the Bulletin Board. Establishing a Bulletin Board - Refer to Section 3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-79. Sending a document to a Bulletin Board - Refer to Section 2.15 Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board on page 6-25. Downloading a registered document from a Bulletin Board - Refer to Section 3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board on page 6-34.

6 - 24

i i i
  

When an F-CODE password is required:


Select the F-CODE password (SID/ PWD).

F-CODEs can be registered in a One-Touch key . Refer to Section 2.12 Registering One-Touch Keys in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-30. To print Confidential F-CODE documents:
Press [Job List] to print the document from the [Doc.] confirmation screen.

Refer to Section 2.8 Selecting the Various Copy Formats in Chapter 2 Copy Operations on page 2-48.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Remote Multi-Copies: The sender can specify the number of copies to be printed at the receiving side. Procedure for Remote Multi-Copying Specify the F-CODE (SUB) as follows:

Details on setting an F-CODE: When the NEC IT3520/IT2520 receives an F-CODE, it first searches for the F-CODE from the Bulletin Board (1 to 10), and if there is no appropriate F-CODE, it goes on to search the Confidential Boxes (1 to 10) that have been set for each user. When you set an F-CODE, it is recommended to manage them by classifying the numbers for the Confidential Box and the Bulletin Board.

2.15

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board Documents can be made available to anyone by establishing a mailbox on the unit. Those who know the password can register documents on the Bulletin Board either on-site, or from a remote facsimile. For example, a Bulletin Board might be established to hold a companys latest sales brochure, or technical information updates about a certain product. This information can be retrieved on demand, at the convenience of the recipient.
Before Starting Operations:
Before registering a document on a Bulletin Board, the Bulletin Board must be established do that F-CODE passwords can be registered. Refer to Section 3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-79.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

, ,

02

05
Specifies the desired number of copies to be printed at the receiving end. Function code: Specify 02 for the Remote Multi-Copying function.

6 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

When documents are registered on a Bulletin Board from a remote facsimile, the F-CODE and F-CODE password registered for each Bulletin Board need to be specified. If the F-CODE and F-CODE password do not match, the document cannot be registered on the Bulletin Board. Refer to Section 2.14 F-CODE on page 6-22. Up to 10 Bulletin Boards can be established. Only one document can be registered per Bulletin Board. If a new document is registered on a Bulletin Board where another already exists, the new document data replaces the previously registered data.

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Bulletin Reg].

4.

Touch the Bulletin Board number to register the document.

6 - 26

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board (Continued)

5.

Select the image quality, then touch [Next].

6.

Select the contrast setting, then touch [Next].

7.

Select the reduction and scan area settings, then touch [Next].

8.

Select the transmission function.

9.

Press <Start>. The document is now transmitted.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board (Continued)

10. Touch [Enter].

Registering a Document from a Remote Facsimile

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Place the document in the unit. Set the transmission features (such as image quality, contrast, etc.). Enter SUB for the F-CODE of the Bulletin Board to register the document. Enter SID/PWD for the password of the Bulletin Board (F-CODE password) to register the document. Dial the facsimile number of the NEC IT3520/IT2520. Press the units Start key (or its equivalent). The document is sent to the IT3520/IT2520 and is registered into the proper Bulletin Board.

6 - 28

Any previously registered document in the Bulletin Board will be replaced by this new incoming document.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.16

Polling Transmission This feature allows the receiving side to automatically request transmission of documents stored into the memory of the sending side.
Before Starting Operations:
The document stored in memory is deleted after it is transmitted. Polling Transmission is not available if the memory is full. Only one document can be selected for Polling Transmission. This feature cannot be used if there is another document already selected to be sent. The feature is reset after each transmission.

Polling Transmission

1. 2. 3.

Load the document in the unit.


Refer to Section 5 Handling Documents in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-31.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Polling TX].

4.

Select the image quality for the document to be sent, then touch [Next].
Refer to Section 2.9 Sending Fine Print and Photos in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-14.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

6 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Polling Transmission (Continued)

5.

Select the contrast setting for the document to be sent, then touch [Next].
Refer to Section 2.10 Adjusting Contrast in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-16.

6.

Select the reduction and the scanning area of the document to be sent, then touch [Next].
Refer to Section 2.11 Sending Documents without Reduction in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-17, and Section 2.12 Selecting the Scan Area in Chapter 5 Basic Sending and Receiving Operations on page 5-19.

7.

Select the desired transmission setting(s).

8. 9.

Press <Start>. The document is scanned. Touch [Enter].

6 - 30

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

2.17

Manual Reception The NEC IT3520/IT2520 normally receives a document automatically (Automatic Reception), but you can also receive a document after talking on the telephone.
Before Starting Operations:
An external telephone (not provided) is required for Manual Reception.

Switching to Manual Reception

1.

Touch [Manual] on the reception mode setting screen.

2. 1. 2. 3.

Manual Reception Procedure

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i

Skip this step if [Manual] is highlighted. Refer to Section 2.3 Setting the Reception Functions in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-35.

Touch [Enter] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

When the telephone rings, press <Fax/Mail/Scan> and then pick up the handset to speak to the caller. After talking, press <Start> when you hear facsimile tones through the handset. Replace the handset in its cradle.
A "beep" sound is heard when reception is completed.

6 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

SECTION 3

ADVANCED RECEPTION OPERATIONS

3.1

Password Reception When a receive password is set, a document will only be received when both sending and receiving ends have matching passwords. This feature can be used to filter out junk facsimiles. Necessary registration: The Communication Password must be registered in advance. Refer to Section 2.11 Registering Passwords for Secured Communications in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-28.
Before Starting Operations:
The senders facsimile must be registered with the same communication password as registered in the IT3520/IT2520. Depending on the senders make and model of facsimile, password communication may not be possible. To use this feature, a software switch must be set. Refer to Setting the Transmission Marker and Password Check (Mode 000) on page 4-64.

3.2

Selecting Password Reception Refer to Section 2.3 Setting the Reception Functions in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-35.

3.3

Receive Polling and Start Timer When Receive Polling is selected, a document stored at the remote side can be retrieved by the NEC IT3520/IT2520. A timer may be added to the polling feature, so that the document is retrieved at a specified time.

Receive Polling

1.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>.

6 - 32

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Receive Polling (Continued)

2.

Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Polling RX].

3.

Select the destination input method.

4. 5.

Select the senders facsimile number, and touch [Next]. Select the reception time.

6.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

Select the time:


Touch [Hour] or [Minute] and use the 10-key Pad to enter the time. The digits can be cleared by pressing <C>.

When reception time is not selected:


Touch [Timer Off].

Press <Start>.

6 - 33

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Receive Polling (Continued)

7.
3.4

Touch [Enter]. Reception will begin at the specified time.

Retrieving from a Bulletin Board A document that has been registered on another units Bulletin Board can be downloaded.
Before Starting Operations:
Use a F-CODE to select the Bulletin Board. The F-CODE that has been registered for each Bulletin Board number must be confirmed with the other party in advance of starting. If access to the Bulletin Board is password restricted by the other partys facsimile, the F-CODE password also needs to be confirmed.

Downloading Documents Registered on your IT3520/IT2520s Bulletin Board:


Different operations must be used to download documents registered on your own facsimiles Bulletin Board.

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board

1. 2.

Press <Fax/Mail/Scan>. Select [Appl.] from [FAX Menu], then touch [Retrieve].

6 - 34

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board (Continued)

3.

Select the destination input method.

Using the 10-key Pad to Select:

3. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the F-CODE of the Bulletin Board, then touch [Enter].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

Using One-Touch dialing to select:


The F-CODE must be registered in advance.

1. Use the 10-key Pad to enter the facsimile number, then touch [F-CODE].

2. Touch [F-CODE (SEP)].


Inputting the F-CODE password:
Touch [F-CODE(SID/PWD)] in the same way, and enter the F-CODE password.

6 - 35

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Using the 10-key Pad to Select:

4. Touch [Enter]. 5. Touch [Next].

Retrieving a Document from a Bulletin Board (Continued)

4.

Select the reception time.

5.

6.

6 - 36

i i

Procedure for setting:


Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and use the 10-key Pad to enter the time. The digits can be deleted by pressing <C>.

When reception time is not selected:


Touch [Timer Off].

Press <Start>.

Touch [Enter]. Reception will begin at the specified time.

Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations

Chapter 7

Reports and Lists

SECTION 1

REPORTS AND LISTS


The NEC IT3520/IT2520 is designed to print a variety of reports for users to check the status of operations such as transmissions, receptions, and other communications reports. In addition, the unit will print confirmation lists of data registered in the machine, such as facsimile numbers, program keys, index keys, etc.

1.1

Printing the Activity Report (TX) The transmission activity report verifies, in report form, important details about the transmitted communications.
Before Starting Operations:
This section describes how to manually print out the report. The IT3520/IT2520 is set to automatically print out this report after 50 transmissions. (Default is 50 transmissions). Refer to Section 2.6 Report Print Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-54. The method of printing the TX Report for Serial Broadcasting can be selected by setting the software switch. Refer to Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Report for Serial Broadcast (Mode 002) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-66.

Printing the Activity Report (TX)

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

7-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Printing the Activity Report (TX) (Continued)

2.

Touch [TX Act. Report].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Activity Report (TX) is printed.

7-2

The report is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-1 Activity Report (TX) Example

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.2

Printing the Activity Report (RX) The reception activity report verifies, in report form, important details about the received communications.
Before Starting Operations:
This section describes how to manually print out the report. Refer to Section 2.6 Report Print Settings in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-54.

Printing the Activity Report (RX)

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2.

Touch [RX Act. Report].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Activity Report (RX) is printed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

The report is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

7-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Figure 7-2 Activity Report (RX) Example

1.3

Printing the One-Touch Key List The facsimile destinations registered in One-Touch Keys can be printed.

Printing the One-Touch Key List

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

7-4

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Printing the One-Touch Key List

2.

Touch [One-Touch List].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The One-Touch List is printed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-3 One-Touch Key List Example

7-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.4

Printing the FAX Program List The information registered in the facsimile program keys can be printed.
Printing the FAX Program List

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2.

Touch [FAX Program List].

3.

Select the program key to be printed.

4.

Touch [Enter]. The FAX Program List is printed.

7-6

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 7-4 FAX Program List Example

1.5

Bulletin Board List The list of documents registered on the Bulletin Board(s) can be printed in report form.
Before Starting Operations:
Refer to Section 3.1 Establishing a Bulletin Board in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-79, Section 2.15 Registering a Document on a Bulletin Board in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 625, and Section 3.4 Retrieving from a Bulletin Board in Chapter 6 Advanced Sending and Receiving Operations on page 6-34.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

7-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Printing the Bulletin Board List

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [Reports].

2.

Touch [Bulletin Board List].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Bulletin Board List is printed.

7-8

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 7-5 Bulletin Board List Example

1.6

Confirming the Confidential Box Information Registered information in the Confidential Box can be printed as a confidential list.
Confirming the Confidential Box Information

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Touch [Reports].

3.

Touch [Confidential List].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

7-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Confirming the Confidential Box Information

4.

Touch [Enter]. The Confidential List is now printed.

1.7

Printing the Account List Account data, such as the Account name and setting status for communications data, can be confirmed for each Account.
Before Starting Operations:
All data registered for each Account can be printed.

7 - 10

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-6 Confidential List Example

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Printing the Account List :

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator management screen and touch [Rep. Print].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

2.

Touch [Account List].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Account List is printed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

7 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Report Details

Figure 7-7 Account List Example

1.8

Printing the Setting List The status of the various machine settings can be verified with the Setting List.
Before Starting Operations:
This report can only be printed by the administrator.

Printing the Setting List

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [Rep. Print].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 3-9.

7 - 12

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Printing the Setting List (Continued)

2.

Touch [Setting List].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Setting List is printed.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Figure 7-8 Setting List Example

7 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

1.9

Confirming the Condition of Forwarding The condition of Forwarding (after Forwarding is set) can be confirmed.
Before Starting Operations:
Only the Administrator can print out the Forwarding List.

Confirming the Condition of Forwarding

1.

Select [Admin. 1] on the Administrator Management screen, and touch [Rep. Print].
Refer to Section 2.2 Accessing the Administrator Management Screen in Chapter 3 Registration and Setting Operations on page 39

2.

Touch [Forward List].

3.

Touch [Enter]. The Forward List is now printed.

7 - 14

The list is printed even if [Enter] is not touched.

Reports and Lists

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Figure 7-9 Forward List Example

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

7 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

7 - 16

Reports and Lists

Chapter 8

Troubleshooting

SECTION 1

DISPLAY ICONS AND ALARM MESSAGES


This section describes the icons that indicate the current status of the unit operation, and the alarm messages that are displayed whenever an abnormality occurs.

Icons are displayed in this area of the screen.

1.1

Display Icons The following icons will be displayed on the touch panel to indicate various unit operations.
Table 8-1 Symbol Message Display Icons Description

Dialing Dial Wait Copying Scanning Receiving Sending Waiting for polling Bulletin Board

Now dialing the number. Waiting to re-dial. Now copying. Now scanning a document to transmit by facsimile. Now receiving a facsimile. Now sending a facsimile. A document is waiting for polling transmission. A document is registered on the bulletin board.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Table 8-1 Symbol Message

Display Icons (Continued) Description

Received document Auto RX mode off Printing Waiting to print Received PC data PC data in memory Account operating No print paper No toner Replace the drum Periodic inspection Memory Recall

There is a received document in the mailbox. Automatic reception is off (Manual mode is on). Now printing. A document is waiting to be printed. Now receiving data for the PC printer. Data is retained for the PC printer. Operating by selecting the Account in the Account Administration mode. Restock the recording paper. Replace the toner bottle. The imaging unit needs to be replaced. It is time for periodic inspection to be done. There is a document available to perform Memory Recall.

1.2

Alarm Messages Use the following list of alarm messages and solutions to determine the best remedy for a problem.
Table 8-2 Alarm Messages Messages Causes Countermeasure

Malfunction detected. Call for service. Properly close the section(s) indicated by the arrow(s). Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at

There is a fault within the main unit. A door on the main unit, or an optional part is not closed correctly. Print paper or document is jammed.

Contact your dealer for service. Close the door indicated by the arrow(s).

Remove the print paper or document from the indicated area.

8-2

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued) Messages Causes Countermeasure

Your account has reached its maximum copies allowed. Please call your administrator.

The number of copies made has reached the maximum value set by the administrator. Copying is impossible because the accumulated number of pages copied has reached the maximum set by the administrator. The toner supply is running low. The toner has run out. The life of the drum is exhausted. The life of the drum is exhausted.

Ask the administrator to clear accumulated number of pages copied. Ask the administrator to change the setting for the maximum number of copied pages. Retry copying after resetting the mode. Ask the administrator to clear the number of accumulated number of copied pages.

The selected copy job will exceed the maximum allowance. Job cannot be processed. Call your administrator. Toner is low. Please add toner. Replace Image Unit. The Imaging Unit needs to be changed. Call you technical representative. Install the Imaging Unit.

Replace the toner bottle. Replace the toner bottle. Replace the Imaging Unit. Replace the Imaging Unit.

The imaging unit (drum) is not installed. The document tray is full of printed pages.

Install the Imaging Unit.

The Exit Tray has reached its maximum capacity. Please remove all copies from the tray as indicated by the arrow(s). Image data has caused memory overflow. Your copy job has been canceled.

Remove the paper from the Exit Tray.

Memory is full.

Retry copying after reducing the number of pages. Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued) Messages Causes Countermeasure

Memory is full.

Memory is full.

Reserve for transmission after memory becomes available. Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space. Reserve for transmission after memory becomes available. Print out any documents waiting to be printed. This will free up memory space. Remove the document from the Book Scanner glass. Select the paper. Load the proper size print paper.

Setting operation cannot be made due to memory full.

Memory is full.

Original left on Glass.

A page remains on the Book Scanner glass. There is no appropriate paper in any cassette that meets the document size and scaling factor specified. There is no appropriate paper in any cassette that meets the document size and scaling factor specified. There is no appropriate paper in Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. The scaling factor calculated from the selected paper size and document size is not within the proper range. The paper in the selected cassette.

Matching paper size is not available. Choose another paper size.

Paper setting is not correct. Please set paper correctly.

Select the paper. Load the proper size print paper.

Matching paper size in not available. Please place matching paper size in Bypass Tray. Auto Size mode cannot be used with the selected paper size. Please select a zoom ratio. Replenish paper.

Place the indicated size paper in Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. Set the proper scaling factor. Select the paper.

Load print paper.

8-4

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued) Messages Causes Countermeasure

Please reposition original.

Document size could not be detected, due to the Sleep Mode being active. Paper remains on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass tray. A function that does not accept an interruption is selected. A paper cassette with paper that cannot be printed on both sides is selected for 2-Sided copying. A paper cassette with paper that cannot be copied on both sides is selected after 2-Sided Copying is selected. Stapling or 2-Sided Copying is selected after a cassette with thick paper or OHP sheets is selected. Direction of the document and the selected position for the Hole-Punch is not proper. Paper remains in the non-sort tray.

Replace the original again. When Sleep Mode is active, cancel the Sleep Mode first, and then place the document. Remove all paper remaining on the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray. Reset the Interrupt mode or the function currently selected.

Please remove paper in the Bypass Tray. This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Interrupt Mode. This mode cannot be selected in combination with the 2sided Copy Mode. This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Duplexing Mode.

Reselect the paper. Cancel 2-Sided Copying.

Reselect the paper. Cancel 2-Sided Copying.

This mode cannot be selected in combination with the Exclusive Paper Mode (i.e. envelope, OHP, etc.). The selected position cannot be holepunched. Cancel HolePunch mode or change the position. Please remove all copies in the non-sort tray.

Cancel the stapling or 2-Sided Copy function. Reselect the paper.

Change the direction of the document. Change the HolePunch position. Cancel HolePunch mode. Remove all paper from the nonsort tray.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8-5

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Table 8-2 Alarm Messages (Continued) Messages Causes Countermeasure

This screen cannot be changed now. Select Interrupt Mode to change the application. Return the following number of originals to Document Feeder. Cannot interrupt this job (not enough free memory). Press Start to resume.

<Fax/Mail/Scan> is pressed while the copying function is active. A paper jam has occurred while using the ADF for copying. <Interrupt> is pressed, but interruption is unavailable because the memory capacity is insufficient. <Interrupt> is pressed, but interruption is unavailable because the memory capacity is insufficient. The document size could not be detected with the automatic paper mode. The document size could not be detected with the automatic size mode. The document size could not be detected. The document size could not be detected.

Press <Interrupt> to stop copying, then press <Fax/Mail/ Scan>. Return the indicated number of pages to the ADF. Press <Start> to restart the copying operation prior to interruption.

Cannot interrupt this job :not enough free memory.

Wait until memory becomes available.

Original Size cannot be detected. Re-select the paper size. Original size cannot be detected. Select Zoom.

Select the paper size.

Set the zoom ratio. Select a different paper size.

Original size cannot be detected. Enter the Originals size. Original size cannot be detected. Reposition original or cancel following modes:

Place the document again. Reselect the document size. Cancel the image repeating function. Place the document again. Reselect the document size. Cancel the indicated functions.

8-6

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

1.3

Document Jam Use the procedure shown to clear a document jam.


Before Starting Operations:
If the document becomes jammed, the touch panel displays a message: "Misfeed detected. Remove misfeed at ." and shows the cover needed to be opened to remove the jam. Open the cover indicated at the arrow and remove the jam.

Jam in the Document Feeder Cover:

1.

Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

2.

Slowly withdraw the jammed sheet.

3.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

If the document is wrapped around the roller, the page should be pulled out carefully. It may be possible to pull out the sheet from the back side of the document feeder.

Open the Document Guide Plate.


If the document is jammed in the Document Guide side, pull the lever (the one that is at the front of the Document Guide) and open the Document Guide Plate.

8-7

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Jam in the Document Feeder Cover: (Continued)

4.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper by turning the dial.

5.

Lower the Document Feeder Cover.

Jam under the Document Feeder Tray:

1.

Pull the lever and lift the Document Feeder Cover.

2.

Holding the Document Feeder Tray by hand, slowly withdraw the jammed sheet by turning the dial.

8-8

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Jam under the Document Feeder Tray: (Continued)

3.

Lower the Document Feeder Tray, and close the Document Feeder Cover.

Print Paper Jam Use the following procedures to remove jammed print paper.
Before Starting Operations:
If print paper becomes jammed, the touch panel displays a message "A document is jammed. Remove the document from ." , and indicates which cover needs to be opened. Open the cover indicated by an arrow, and remove the jammed paper.

If the Print Paper Frequently Jams:


Confirm how to install the print paper, storage conditions, and the print paper size, etc. Refer to Section 9.1 Installing Print Paper in Chapter 1 Getting Started on page 1-53.

If the Side Cover is Opened to Remove Jammed Paper:


Care should be taken if the imaging unit is needed to be withdrawn in order to remove jammed paper. A toner spill may occur. Toner may ruin the working surface or your clothes.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8-9

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Important Areas to Observe The following areas guide the user to important machine areas. Caution!

Do not touch the copper terminals located within the Side Cover, under the imaging unit. Doing so may cause failure due to static discharge.

Displays and Paper Jam Positions The handling procedure differs according to the position of the paper jam. Refer to the appropriate page indicated for instructions on removing the jammed paper.

Paper Jam at the Main Unit Side Cover:

1.

Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

8 - 10

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the Main Unit Side Cover:

2.

Pull on the lever to open the Side Cover.

3.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

4.

Close the Side Cover.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:


Pull out the paper cassette holding the paper supply that was used, then remove the jammed paper from the cassette side.

Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

8 - 11

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Paper Cassette Side Cover:

1.

Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

2.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

3.

Close the Side Cover.

8 - 12

If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:


Pull out the Universal Cassette and remove the jammed paper from the cassette side.

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the Large Capacity Cabinet Side Cover:

1.

Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

2.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

3.

Close the Side Cover.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Side Cover:


Pull out the Large Capacity Cabinet and remove the jammed paper from the cassette side.

8 - 13

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray:

1.

Lift up on the lever and pull out the cover.

2.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper with pulling out the cover.

Paper Jam at the Side Cover:

1.

Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

2.

Lift up on the lever to open the Side Cover.

8 - 14

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the Side Cover: (Continued)

3.

Open the Paper Guide.

4.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i i i

The area around the fuser is very hot! Do not touch anything other than the jammed paper. Try to remove the jammed paper without removing the imaging unit, if possible. Doing so may cause the toner to spill. Never touch the Transfer Roller (black roller). Printed image quality may become poor.

Transfer Roller

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.


The area around the Fuser Unit is very hot! Extreme caution must be exercised when handling objects in this area.

Close the Paper Guide.

8 - 15

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Side Cover: (Continued)

6.

Close the Side Cover.

7. 1.

Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

Open the front cover.

2.

Open the Finisher cover.

8 - 16

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

3.

Operate the levers and cogs [FN1 to FN5] which are shown on the touch panel, slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

FN3 FN2

FN5 FN4 FN1

4.

5.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

i i

If the staple unit stopped on the way, move the staple unit to the back by rotating the cog. Then slowing withdraw the jammed paper. When the Hole Punch Kit is installed, first pull out the dust box [FN3.1] and then pull the lever [FN3].

If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the Finisher, slowly redraw the jammed paper from the exit tray while rotating the cog [FN6].

Close the Finisher cover.

8 - 17

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Finisher (optional):

6.

Close the front cover.

Paper Jam at the 2-Sided Print Unit (optional):

1.

Open the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

2.

Open the cover of the 2-Sided Print Unit.

3.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper.

8 - 18

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the 2-Sided Print Unit (optional):

4.

Close the 2-Sided Print Unit cover.

5.

Close the Multi-purpose Manual Bypass Tray.

Paper Jam at the Mail-Bin Kit (optional):

1.

Pull the lever.

2.

Open the cover [FN8].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 19

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Paper Jam at the Mail-Bin Kit (optional):

3.

Slowly withdraw the jammed paper. If the jammed paper cannot be removed from the cover [FN8], withdraw the jammed paper from the downside while hold the lever [FN7].

FN7

4.

Close the cover [FN8].

Paper Jam at the Saddle/Folding Kit (optional):

1.

Open the front door.

2.

Turn dial "FN5" or dial "FN6", and then pull out any misfed paper.

8 - 20

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Paper Jam at the Saddle/Folding Kit (optional):

3.

Remove all paper from the paper output tray.

4.

Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then pull out any misfed paper.

5. 6.

Close the misfeed-clearing door. Close the front door.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 21

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

SECTION 2

TROUBLESHOOTING
If trouble develops with the NEC IT3520/IT2520, follow the appropriate instructions described in this section. If these measures fail to resolve the problem, contact your dealers service center.

During the Stand-by Mode


Condition Cause Countermeasure

Power plug at wall outlet is disconnected. Power switch is off. Touch panel does not light.

Connect the power cord at the wall outlet. Turn on the power switch. Press any key on the panel. The time-out period can be adjusted to run off the Touch Panel LCD. Turn off the power switch and wait a few minutes to restore power.

Touch panel is blank.

The thermostat inside the unit has activated due to excessive heat within the product, or electrical interference due to thunderstorms, etc. The panel contrast is set too dark.

Adjust the panel contrast setting. Select an account.

Start key does not light green.

The account has not been selected (when the Account Management mode is activated). Power cord is disconnected from wall outlet.

Connect the power cord at the wall outlet. Reset the circuit breaker.

Power cannot be turned on.

The circuit breaker supplying power to the wall outlet is tripped. Slow reduction in voltage. Power failure occurs.

Turn off the power switch and wait a few minutes before restoring power.

8 - 22

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Copying
Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document is too thick. The document is not scanned. The document is too thin, or too small. Document scanning area is dirty. The wall outlet cannot supply the rated power for this unit.

Use book scanner to copy. Use book scanner to copy. Clean the document scanning area. Be sure to use a wall outlet whose power rating is suitable for this unit. Electrical installation work is required if a suitable wall outlet is not available. Place the document face up and retry copying. Adjust the copy density setting. Adjust the contrast priority level on the copy setting.

Unit cuts off during a copy procedure.

Copies are blank.

The document is placed face down (for the ADF). The copy density setting is inappropriate.

Copy is too faint.

Too many photos or dark documents are copied consecutively. Copying immediately after replacing the toner bottle. Toner is running low. Paper is damp. The copy density setting is inappropriate.

Use the Toner Replenisher key to replenish the toner supply.

Replace the toner bottle. Replace the paper supply. Adjust the copy density setting. Adjust the contrast priority level on the copy setting. Clean the scanning area. Reset the document as close to the glass as possible.

Copy is too dark. Document scanning area is dirty. Document is not flush with the glass surface (on Book Scanner).

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 23

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Copying (Continued)
Condition Cause Countermeasure

Streaky lines appear on the copies.

The document scanning surface, or document pad is dirty. Transparent documents, such as OHP, are being copied.

Clean the scanned surface, or the document pad. Place a blank sheet of white paper on the document during copying. Due to the thin papers transparency, the back side print may show. Reduce the the density level and retry.

-ORThe copies appear shaded.

A very thin document with print on both sides is being copied.

The document pad is dirty. The print paper selected is larger than the origianl document (when direct mode x 1.000 is used for copying). The periphery of the copied area is shaded.

Clean the document pad. Manually select the same sized paper as the original document. Use the appropriate scaling factor to enlarge the document being copied. Manually select the same sized paper as the original document. Reset the paper in the same direction as the original document. Select the appropriate reduction size to suit the paper.

The document size and paper direction are different (when direct mode x 1.000 is used for copying).

The appropriate reduction size is not selected.

8 - 24

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Copying (Continued)
Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document guide plate has not been adjusted properly. The document is not placed correctly on the scanning glass. Dirt or dust on the glass surface is causing trouble (when the 2-Sided Document Feeder is used). The paper is not placed correctly in the cassette. The copied image has folds. The paper is not placed correctly in the cassette. The paper is curled or damp.

Adjust the document guide plate to match the original documents paper width. Place the document on the glass surface using the scale mark. Clean the glass surface thoroughly.

The copied image is skewed.

Line up the edges of the paper with the guides on the cassette. Line up the edges of the paper with the guides on the cassette. Replace the paper.

The Copy function cannot be set.

The Interrupt mode is on.

When the lamp for the Interrupt key lights, the interruption mode is on. Press the <Interrupt> key to reset the function.

Transmission
Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document is too thick. The document is not scanned. The document is too thin, or too small. The scanning area is dirty. The document is skewed during scanning. The document guide plate is not adjusted properly to the width of the document.

Use the Book Scanner for transmission. Use the Book Scanner for transmission. Clean the scanning area. Adjust the document guide plate to the match the document width.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 25

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Transmission (Continued)
Condition Cause Countermeasure

The document is not set correctly. The image received at the receiver is not clear. The scanning area is dirty. The original document is too light. There is a problem with the telephone line connection, or with the receiving facsimile. A blank sheet is printed at the receiving station. The document was placed face down in the ADF.

Set the document correctly. Clean the scanning area. Adjust the contrast that is appropriate for the document. Make a copy with this unit. If the copy is clear, try to resent the document to the receiver. Place the document face up in the ADF and resend.

The number is wrong. Automatic transmission is impossible. The number is a voice number. There is a problem at the receiving end (such as, paper out, toner out, memory full, power off, etc.). The Marker is becoming dry.

Confirm the facsimile number. Confirm the facsimile number. Contact the receiving end and check for trouble.

TX Marker is too light.

Replace the stamp.

Reception
Condition Cause Countermeasure

Approved print paper is not being used. The paper is damp. The received image is not clear. Toner has run out. There is a telephone line problem, or with the sending end.

Only use quality copy paper. Replace the paper supply. Replace the toner bottle. Make a copy on this unit. If the copy is clear, contact the sending side to check for trouble.

8 - 26

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Reception (Continued)
Condition Cause Countermeasure

A blank page is printed on the print paper at this unit.

Toner supply is out. The document was not placed correctly at the sending end. The unit is in the Manual Reception mode.

Replace the toner bottle.

Contact the sending end. Set the Automatic Reception mode. If paper has run out, replace the paper supply to print out the document stored in memory. Follow the troubleshooting instructions to reset the alarm. Make a copy at this unit. If the copy is clear, contact the sending side to check for trouble.

Automatic Reception is impossible.

Memory is full.

An alarm is displayed. Streaks appear on the received copy. There is a problem with the telephone line, or the sending side.

SECTION 3

POWER FAILURE
This section describes how to take action in case of a power failure.

3.1

Documents in Memory are Retained for 12 Hours Transmitted and received documents that are being stored in memory are retained for approximately 12 hours after power is interrupted (provided that the power to the product has been turned on for at least 24 hours prior to the power failure). After 12 hours, the data is subject to being erased. If any documents are lost during a power failure, a Power Failure Report will be printed once power is restored to the unit. This report can be used to confirm the number and destinations of any erased facsimiles.
Refer to Setting the Memory Clear Report and TX Report for Serial Broadcast (Mode 002) in Chapter 4 Advanced Registration and Setting Operations on page 4-66.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 27

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Figure 8-1 Memory Clear Report Example

3.2

Registered Items are Retained Registered data such as date, time, registered facsimile numbers, passwords, management information, user registration, etc. are retained regardless of the power failure duration. This data is stored using another battery and reregistration of data is unnecessary.

SECTION 4

DEHUMIDIFY FUNCTION
Condensation may build up around the scanning area and optics inside the unit when rapid temperature changes occur. This moisture can accumulate and cause image quality to degrade. This section describes how the dehumidify (condensation) function can be set to prevent this problem from occurring. Dehumidify Procedure: The lamp in the document scanning area lights for five minutes. evaporate any moisture inside the scanning area. This will

Dehumidify Function: This function can be set to automatically turn on at a set time every day. Enter the time using the 24-hour clock.

8 - 28

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Dehumidify Procedure

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [User Management].

2.

Touch [Dehumidify]. The moisture inside the scanning area now begins to evaporate.

3.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Setting the Scanner Dry Function

1. 2.

Press <Utility>. Touch [User Set].

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 29

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Setting the Scanner Dry Function (Continued)

3.

Touch [Users Choice].

4.

Select tab [5/6] and touch [Scanner Dry].

5.

Enter the start time to begin the procedure, then touch [Enter].

6.

8 - 30

i i

To Select:
Touch [Hour] or [Minute], and then enter the time using the 10-key Pad. When [Cancel] is touched, the function is deactivated.

To re-enter:
Press <C> to clear, and re-enter.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

Troubleshooting

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

SECTION 5

TONER REPLENISHMENT
The printing may temporarily become faint after printing large areas of dark, or a large amount of photos. In cases such as these, the toner supply can be manually replenished to improve the print quality.
Before Starting Operations:
Do not turn off the power and open the side cover while the toner is being replenished. Only replenish the toner if the copy appears faint.

Toner Replenishment Procedure

1.

Press <Utility>, and touch [User Management].

2.

Touch [Toner Replenisher]. The units toner supply is replenished.

3.

Touch [Enter] repeatedly and [Exit] until the display returns to the stand-by screen.

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

8 - 31

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

8 - 32

Troubleshooting

Appendix A

Glossary of Terms

This glossary is provided to help define terms used throughout this documentation.

Term

Definition

Automatic Document Feeder

A mechanism that automatically feeds a number of document pages, one after the other. ADFs can feed single-sided or double-sided pages, depending on the design. This feature provides convenience and cost savings. The destinations facsimile number and a timer are registered in a program key. All throughout the work day, documents bound for the registered destination are stored into memory, rather than being transmitted one-by-one. When the registered time is met, all the stored documents are then sent during one call. This can save on costly telephone charges, if the registered timer is set for after-peak hour times. A bound document is one that has its pages attached, stitched, or glued together such that the individual pages will not come loose. Examples include: books, magazines, reports, proposals, and catalogs. When copies or faxes of these documents are needed, it requires a book scanner rather than an ADF. A mechanism that scans bound document pages for making copies or faxing. When a mail box is established in the memory and information is assigned, the information can be disclosed to anyone who wants to read it. A telephone or facsimile number can be dialed via one of the following methods: 10-key Pad dialing, One-touch keys, and Program keys. This function provides a facsimile communication function using codes such as Sub-Address (SUB), Selective Polling (SEP), and Password (PWD) defined in the G3 Standards of the ITU-T. The FCODE enables confidential transmission and bulletin communications between facsimiles that support F-CODE protocol.

Batch Transmission

Bound Document

Book Scanner Bulletin Board

Dialing

F-CODE

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

A-1

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

Term

Definition

G3 Communications

Communications that conforms to G3 standard (International Standards for Facsimile Communications). A facsimile communication via the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). An optional G3 facsimile port allowing simultaneous communication (sending and receiving) on both lines. For example: Transmission/Transmission Transmission/Reception Reception/Reception Acronym for the International Telecommunications Union. This group used to be called the CCITT, and is responsible for standardizing facsimile communications. A new method of data compression/decompression standardized by the Joint Bilevel Image Expert Group, a subcommittee of the ITU-T. JBIG is a very effective coding method for transferring large and high resolution image data, such as grayscale (GSR) images and photos. The ability for the operator to send and receive a facsimile after answering and speaking on the telephone. The device(s) in a facsimile that stores image data. Generally speaking, the larger the memory size means that more image data (pages) can be stored. Memory is also used by the printing function, if the facsimile unit has a PC printing ability. If the print paper runs out during a facsimile reception, the image data is automatically stored into memory, and then printed when the paper supply is replaced. Likewise, if the facsimile develops a paper jam, or runs out of toner, the received document will be stored into memory until the problem is resolved. This feature offers dialing without lifting the telephone handset. The machines speaker is activated so the operator can hear if the destinations facsimile number is busy, or if the line is connected to a live operator. A PBX is telephone system equipment that is installed in a company to connect a large number of telephone sets incorporating multiple station lines for advanced telephone operations. Items like voice processing, direct inward dialing, and automated attendant features are available via a PBX. A dialing signal used on a telephone line consisting of two sets of frequency tones combining together. The resulting tone is decoded, by the telephone equipment, as a dialed digit. By touching [Tone], the touchtone (PB) line becomes available even if a dial phone line (DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps) is connected.

2nd G3 Port

ITU-T

JBIG Coding

Manual Reception/ Transmission Memory

Memory Reception

On-hook Dialing

Private Branch Exchange (PBX)

Push Button Signal

A-2

Glossary of Terms

NEC IT Series

Issue 2

Term

Definition

Quick Memory Transmission

A feature which dials a facsimile telephone number immediately after the first document page is scanned. The remaining pages continue to scan into memory while the pages already stored are sent. Many facsimile machines wait to dial a destination number after all the document is stored. High-speed facsimile transmission mode via the PSTN and adopted by the ITU-T. Using the V.34 facsimile modem and the JBIG coding method, it is possible to send a ITU-T test chart (similar to a typical one-page text letter) in under three seconds.

Super G3

NEC IT3520/IT2520 Operations Manual

A-3

Issue 2

NEC IT Series

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

A-4

Glossary of Terms

3002 rebmeceD )E(950001-DN

10065CC 2 eussI snoituloS tnemucoD .cnI ,aciremA CEN

NEC IT3520/IT2520

Operations Manual

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi